Chevrolet 2003 Express, 2003 Owner's manual

Chevrolet 2003 Express, 2003 Owner's manual
8
Q
>
L
c9
0
0
cv
a,
I-
c
Canadian Owners
You can obtain a French copy of this manual from your
dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the name
CHEVY EXPRESS are registered trademarks of
General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever
it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the
new owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. C2314 A First Edition
How to Use This Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If
you do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain things.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s
in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.
@Copyright General Motors Corporation 07/15/02
All Rights Reserved
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about
things that cou!d hurt you if you were to ignore the
warning.
I
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,’’
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t let
this happen.”
These mean tl.,:e is son.--hing that cou.- hurt
you orotherpeople.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you
or others could be hurt.
...
Ill
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
Your vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle,
are shown along with the text describing the operation
or information relating to a specific component, control,
message, gage or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice will tell you about something that can damage
your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the
notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the
damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage or indicator reference the following
topics:
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
iv
These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
A
LATCH BOTH LAPAND
SHOULDER BELTS TO
PRaTECT OCCUPANT
DONOTTWISTSAFETY
BELT WHEN ATTACHING
e,
-
JGHTING
MASTER
SWITCH /
4
TURN
SIGNALS
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
4CID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
MOVE SEAT
FULLY
REARWARD*
SECURE
CHILD SEAT
\$!
DO NOT INSTALL
A REAR-FACING
LAMPS
FUSE
BOX
ACCESS
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMP
\
@e
BATERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
pt
BRAKE
/
z
P I
(a)
IN THIS SEATING
POSITION
d
COOLANT
PULL BELT
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATERY
DO NOTINSTALLA
FORWARD-FACING
CHILD RESTRAINT
IN THIS SEATING
POSITION
COMPLETELY
THEN SECURE
CHILD SEAT
'\b
I
@**o
DAYTIME 9.0
RUNNING
..9
LAMPS
n
POWER
WINDOW
1 1
9
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
LAMPS
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
$0
9 5
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
ENGINE
COOLANT
FAN
(@)
FUEL
OWNERS
MANUAL
SERVICE
MANUAL
Model Reference
This manual covers these models:
Cargo Van
Passenger Van
I
Cab and Chassis
vi
Section
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats .............................
..........l -3
Manual Seats ................................................ 1-3
Power
Seat
..................................
.......... 1-4
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................ 1-4
Rear Seats ....................................................... 1-6
Rear Seat Operation ....................................... 1-6
Safety Belts ................................................... 1-10
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................ 1-10
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-14
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................. 1-15
Driver Position ............................................. -1-1 6
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .................. 1-24
Right Front Passenger Position ....................... 1-25
Center Passenger Position (2nd Row) . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Center Passenger Position
(3rd, 4th and 5th Row) ............................... 1-26
Rear Seat Passengers .................................. 1.27
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults ....................................... 1.30
Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................... 1.33
Safety Belt Extender ..................................... 1.33
Child Restraints ................................
......1-34
Older Children .................................
.....1-34
infants and Young Children ............................ 1-36
Child Restraint Systems ................................. 1-42
Where to Put the Restraint ............................. 1-45
Top Strap .................................................... 1-49
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................. 1-50
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ........................... 1-51
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ......................................... 1-53
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside
Seat Position ............................................ 1-54
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Seat
Position (2nd Row) .................................... 1-57
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Seat
Position (3rd, 4th and 5th Row) ................... 1-58
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ............................................ 1-59
1-1
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
~
Air Bag System .............................................. 1-64Sewicing
YourAirBag-Equipped
Vehicle ......... 1-76
WhereAre the AirBags? ............................... 1-66
AddingEquipment to YourAirBag-Equipped
Vehicle .................................................... 1-76
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-68
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? ..................... 1-70
Restraint SystemCheck .................................. 1-77
How Does an Air
Bag Restrain? ..................... 1-70
Checking
Your
Restraint Systems ................... 1-77
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
WhatWillYouSee
Afteran AirBag Inflates? ...1-70
Air Bag Off Switch ........................................ 1-72
Crash ...................................................... 1-78
1-2
Front Seats
Manual Seats
To adjust the seat, pull the lever up to release the seat
bottom. Slide the seat to where you want it and then
release the lever. Try to move the seat with your body,
to make sure the seat is locked into place.
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
The bucket seats can be adjusted forward or rearward
with the lever located at the front of the seat.
1-3
Power Seat
Reclining Seatbacks
If your vehicle has a power seat on the driver’s or
passenger’s side, you can adjust it with these controls
located at the front center of the seat cushion.
To adjust the seatback, lift the front of the lever, which
is located on the inboard side of the seat cushion.
To raise or lower the seat, move the center knob up or
down. To move the seat forward or rearward, move
the center knob toward the right or left.
To raise or lower the front of the seat cushion, move the
right lever up or down. To raise or lower the rear of
the seat cushion, move the left lever up or down.
1-4
Move the seatback with your body and release the lever
to lock the seatback where you want it. Lean forward
and pull up on the front of the lever and the seatback will
go to an upright position.
Sit ....g in a re,..nec dosition when ya vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job
when you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat andwear your safety belt
properly.
1-5
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
Removing the Rear Seat
1. Disconnect the quick release latch plates for the lap
shoulder belts on the bench seat to be removed. To
do this, press the tip of a key into the release
hole of the safety belt buckle while pulling up on the
safety belt.
1-6
There are two pins located on the inboard sides of the
rear seats. If the vehicle has floor mats, the pins
will be located under a flap that has been cut into the
mat.The driver’s side pin will have a black cap with
an “I-” marked on it and will look like this:
The passenger’s side pin will have a white cap with an
“R” marked on it and will look like this:
7. For the first rear seat,
stow the safety belt latch
by attaching the clip
on the safety belt latch to
the trim just inside the
side door. For the
remaining rear seats,
stow the safety belt latch
plate on the clip at the
window trim.
2. Pull the pin handle up which will loosen the pin
from the retaining clip.
3. Once the black or white pin is disengaged, pull the
pin completely out.
4. Repeat this procedure for the pin on the other
seat base.
5. Pull the seat rearward about two inches (5 cm) and
then lift the seat from the floor rails.
6. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
1-7
Replacing the Rear Seats
A seat that isn’t locked i n k ,lace properly can
move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
installing it.
A safety be.. .hat is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted won’t provide the
protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
1-8
1. Position the seat into the open slots in both rails.
Push the seat forward in the rail, hooking both
seat bases onto the pins inside of the rails.
I
2. To install the locking pins at the rear of the seat
base, locate the hole in the rail for the pin. It is
found on the inboard side of the seat. If the vehicle
has floor mats, pull the flap that has been cut
into the mat.
3. Insert the black or white locking pin into the seat
base. Possible slight seat pushing may be needed
to line up the pin with the base. Remember,
each pin has its own side. The pin with the white
handle marked “R” must be installed on the
passenger’s side and the pin with the black handle
marked “L” on the driver’s side.
4. Push the pin with the white handle marked “R”
down until it is in the retaining clip.
5. Push the pin with the black handle marked ‘I“
down until it is in the retaining clip.
6. If the vehicle has a floor mat, put the flap back to
its original position.
7. Repeat this procedure for the other seat base.
8. Connect the quick-release latch plates for the
lap-shoulder belts by inserting the latch plates
into the buckles attached at the outboard positions
of the bench seat. Do not twist the belt.
9. Check that both locking pins are locked into place
before operating the vehicle.
1-9
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
a
a
Don’t let anyone ride
lere he or she can’t
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
1-10
It is extremely dangerous to ride ina cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.Do not
allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is ina
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See
Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-26.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here's why: They work.
You never know if you'll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don't know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person wouldn't survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it's just a seat on
wheels.
1-11
3
(D
I
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
or the instrument panel ...
1-13
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be - whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-14
A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts - not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has
air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent
driver, but if you’re in an
l
accident - even one that isn’t your fault - y o ~and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 7-34
or lnfants and Young Children on page 7-36. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
1-15
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it
properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-33.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-16
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash.
1-17
ShoulderBeltHeightAdjuster
Before
you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
To move it down, pull on
the center adjuster control
labeled PULL. You can
move the adjuster up just
by pushing up on the
shoulder belt guide.
---.After you move the adjuster to where
you
want
it,
try to
move it down without pushing in to make sure it has
locked into position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on your shoulder. The beltshouldbe
Off your
away from your face andneck,butnotfalling
shoulder.
.
.
--- ... ,.
1-18
Q: What’s wrong with this?
YQU can be seriously hurt id your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-19
Q: What’s wrong with this?
1
You can be seriously injured i our belt is
buckled in the wrong place like-this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.The
belt forces would bethere, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-20
Q: What’s wrong with this?
You can be seri~uslyinjured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be
sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-21
Q: What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver orspleen.
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
J
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-22
Q: What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
1
I
I
I
1
I
I
1
I
I
I
J
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-23
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-24
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly,
Center Passenger Position
(2nd Row)
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-16.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt - except for one
thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out
all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all
the way and start again.
If your vehicle has a second row bench seat, someone
can sit in the center position. When you sit in the
center position in the second row bench seat, you have
a lap-shoulder belt which works the same way as the
rear seat outside passengers’ belts. To learn how
to wear a lap-shoulder belt see, “Lap-Shoulder Belt”
under Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-27.
1-25
Center Passenger Position
(3rd, 4th and 5th Row)
Lap Belt
If your vehicle has third, fourth or fifth row bench seats,
someone can sit in the center positions.
When you sit in a center seating position in the third,
fourth or fifth row, you have a lap safety belt, which has
no retractor. To make the belt longer, tilt the latch
plate and pull it along the belt.
1-26
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the
rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long
enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 7-33.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if you ever had to.
The positions next to the windows have
lap-shoulder belts.
1-27
Lap-Shoulder Belt
Here’s how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way
and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-33.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way
you will engage the child restraint locking feature.
1-28
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
L
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-29
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Your vehicle may have this feature already. If it doesn’t,
you can get it from any GM dealer.
Rear safety belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions
the belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide available for each outside passenger
position in the rear seats. To provide added safety
belt comfort for children who have outgrown child
restraints and booster seats and for smaller adults, the
comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder
belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide and use the
safety belt:
1. Locate the guide on the side of the seatback.
1-30
I
~
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-27.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides.
1-32
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) of your
vehicle is lower than 8600, your vehicle has safety belt
pretensioners. You can find the GVWR on the
certification label located on the rear edge of the driver’s
door. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30 for
more information.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
The safety belt pretensioners are located on the buckle
end of the safety belts for the driver and right front
passenger. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe crash in
which the front of the vehicle hits something.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. The extender
will be just for you, and just for the seat in your
vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it,
and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear
it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you’ll need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-78.
1-33
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can
strike other people who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need to use
safety belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle's safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a seating
position that has a lap-shoulder belt to get the additional
restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
1-34
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child's face or neck?
A: If the child is seated in a rear outside seat position,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
See Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults on page 1-30. I f the child is
sitting in the second row center seat position, move
the child toward the safety belt buckle. In either
case, be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the
child's shoulder, so that in a crash the child's upper
body would have the restraint that belts provide.
If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still
very close to the child's face or neck, you might
want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt,
if your vehicle has one.
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can't properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person ata time.
I
I
1-35
I=
(Continued)
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the beltin
CAUTION:
1-36
(Continued)
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need for everyone to use safety restraints. In
fact, the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some
age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by the
appropriate restraint. Young children should not use the
vehicle’s safety belts without an additional restraint,
unless there is no other choice.
Cargo Vans with a Passenger Air Bag
and an Air Bag Off Switch, Passenger
Vans and Cab and Chassis Models
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh
much until a crash. During a crash a baby
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold
it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240-lb. (1 10 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
--
1-37
Children who are up agai t, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer outstanding protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide.
~
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
1-38
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
youngchild is quite
Th 3ody strucl e o
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that’s
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
~
1-39
Cargo Vans with a Passenger Air Bag
and without an Air Bag Off Switch
Children who are up against, or very close to,
an air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer outstanding protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for thehead and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
CAUTION:
1-40
(Continued)
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. Ina crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest partof an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be restrained in appropriate
infant restraints. However, infants, who should
be restrained in a rear-facing child restraint,
cannot ride safely in this vehicle.
The body structure of a young child is ite
unlike that of an adult or older child,for^ whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
CAUTION:
(Continued)
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would appiy force on a bodyarea that’s
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
Pe,Je
s h d d never hold a baby i.. Ihe-. Arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh
much -- until a crash. During a crash a baby
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold
it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms.
1-41
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-42
-
I
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child's body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle's safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-43
0:How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint
One system, the three-point harness, has straps
that come down over each of the infant’s shoulders
and buckle together at the crotch. The five-point
harness system has two shoulder straps, two hip
straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take
the place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has
shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which
rests low against the child’s body. A shelf- or
armrest-type shield has straps that are attached to
a wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or to
the side.
1-44
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured
within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal
injury. When securing an add-on child restraint, refer
to the instructions that come with the restraint which may
be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and
to this manual. The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Passenger Vans without an Air Bag Off
Switch
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We,
therefore, recommend that child restraints be secured
in a rear seat including an infant riding in a rear-facing
infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat and an older child riding in a booster seat. If your
vehicle has a front passenger air bag, never put a
rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat.
Here’s why:
A child in a rear-fac.. :hil. -estraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the air bag inflates.
This is because the back of the rear-facing
child restraint would be very close to the
inflating air bag. If your vehicle has a right
front passenger’s air bag, always secure a
rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.
.~
You may secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, but before you
do, always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It’s better to secure the
child restraint in a rear seat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle - even when no child
is in it.
1-45
Passenger Vans with an Air Bag Off
Switch
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We,
therefore, recommend that child restraints be secured
in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing
infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat and an older child riding in a booster seat. If you
need to secure a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front passenger’s seat, turn off the passenger’s air
bag. See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-72 and
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat
Position on page 1-59 for more on this, including
im--- rtant safety information.
Even though the AIR BAG OFF switch is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal air
bag, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an air bag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We, therefore recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be transported in
vehicles with a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
whenever possible.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the air bag inflates.
This is because the back of the rear-facing
child restraint would be very close to the
inflating air bag. Be sure to turn off the air bag
before using a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat position.
CAUTION:
1-46
(Continued)
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle - even when no child
is in it.
Cargo Vans and Cab and Chassis
Models without an Air Bag Off Switch
The child restraint must be secured properly in the right
front passenger seat. If your vehicle has a passenger
air bag, never use a rear-facing child restraint in
this vehicle Here’s why:
A L...ld ... a rear-facir., child restrc...t can _ _
seriously injured or killed if the air bag inflates.
This is because the back of the rear-facing
child restraint would be very close to the
inflating air bag. Do not use a rear-facing child
restraint in this vehicle.
If a forward-facing child restraint is suitable for
your child, first move the front passenger seat
as far back as it will go.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle - even when no child
is in it.
1-47
Cargo Vans and Cab and Chassis
Models with an Air Bag Off Switch
The child restraint must be secured properly in the right
front passenger seat. If you need to secure a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat, turn off the passenger’s air bag. See Air Bag
Off Switch on page 1-72 and Securing a Child Restraint
in the Right Front Seat Position on page 1-59 for
more on this, including important safety information.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the air bag inflates.
This is because the back of the rear-facing
child restraint would be very close to the
inflating air bag. Be sure to turnoff the air bag
before using a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat position.
CAUTION:
1-48
(Continued)
Even though the AIR BAG OFF switch is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal air
bag, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an air bag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We, therefore recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be transported in
vehicles with a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
whenever possible.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle - even when no child
is in it.
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.’’ It
can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap
be anchored, don’t use the restraint unless it is anchored
properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
1-49
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restr..int will be placed.
Top Strap Anchor Location
On vehicles with a front passenger seat, the anchor for
the top strap is located at the rear of the seat cushion
on the right front passenger’s seat.
Each top tether b r a c L is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready
to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
1-50
Passenger and Cargo Van Models
If your vehicle is a passenger van with rear seats, an
anchor bracket for a top strap is located at the rear
of the seat cushion for each three-passenger rear bench
seat. Don’t use a child restraint with a top strap in the
right front passenger’s position, or in any four-passenger
rear bench seat.
The top strap is designed for the second row driver side
position and the third/fourth row center seating
positions in a three-passenger rear bench seat.
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
If you have a passenger van, it may have the LATCH
system. If it does, you’ll find two sets of anchors (A)
in the second row of seats in the driver and passenger
side seating positions, where the seatback meets
the seat cushion.
Passenger Van 3-Passenger Rear Seats
Anchor the top strap to this bracket. For the second row
only, in the left outboard seating position, use anchor
point (A). For the right outboard seating position,
use anchor point (B). For a center seating position, use
either anchor point (A) or (B).
1-51
In order to use the system, you need either a
forward-facing child restraint that has attaching
points (B) at its base and a top tether anchor (C), or a
rear-facing child restraint that has attaching points (B),
as shown here.
With this system, use the LATCH system instead of the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure a child restraint.
1-52
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
Id a LATCH-type child restraint isn’t attached to
its anchorage points, the restraint won’t be
able to protect the child correctly. In a crash,
the child could be seriously injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is
properly installed using the anchorage points,
or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the
restraint. See “Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System” or “Securing
a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat
Position” in the Index for information on how
to secure a child restraint in your vehicle.
1. Find the anchors for the seating position you want
to use, where the bottom of the seatback meets the
back of the seat cushion.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to the
anchors in the vehicle. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach the top
strap to the top strap anchor. See Top Strap on
page 7-49.Tighten the top strap according to
the child restraint instructions.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
strap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect the
anchor points.
1-53
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-57.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See Top Strap on
page 7-49 if the child restraint has one. Be sure to
follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-54
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-55
5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to
push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-56
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Center Seat Position (2nd Row)
You’ll be using a lap-shoulder belt which works the
same way as the safety belts in the rear outside seat
positions. To learn how to secure a child restraint with a
lap-shoulder belt, refer to the instructions in Securing
a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position
on page 1-54.
1-57
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Center Seat Position
(3rd, 4th and 5th Row)
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
You’ll be using the lap belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
See Top Strap on page 1-49 if the child restraint
has one.
1-58
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint. If you’re using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
1-59
Unless your vehicle has an air bag off switch and you
have used it to turn the passenger’s air bag off,
never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat. Here’s why:
1-60
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag. If
your vehicle is a passenger van, always secure
a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If
your vehicle is a cargo van with a right front
passenger air bag and an air bagoff switch, be
sure to turn off the air bag before using a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat
position. If your vehicle is a cargo van with a
right front passenger air bag but does not
have an air bagoff switch, do not use a
rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle. If a
forward-facing child restraint is suitable for
your child, always move the passenger seat as
far back as it will go.
Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a
forward-facing child resi ‘nt in the right f it s t.
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the air bag, it means
that something may be wrong with the air bag
system. The right front passenger’s air bag
could inflate even though the switch is off. If
this ever happens, don’t let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a
member of a passenger air bag risk group
sit in the right front passenger’s position
(for example, don’t secure a rear-facing child
restraint in your vehicle) until you have your
vehicle serviced. See “Air Bag Off Switch” in
the Index.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See Top Strap on
page 1-49 if the child restraint has one. Be sure to
follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. If your vehicle has a passenger air bag and an air
bag off switch, and you are using a rear-facing child
restraint in this seat, make sure the air bag is
turned off. See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-72.
If your child restraint is forward-facing, always move
the seat as far back as it will go before securing
it in this seat. See “Seats” in the Index.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how
1-61
3
s
0
(D
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
If you were using a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with an air bag off switch, turn on the right front
passenger’s air bag when you remove the rear-facing
child restraint from the vehicle unless the person
who will be sitting there is a member of a passenger air
bag risk group. See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-72.
6. To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
You may find it helpful to use your knee to push
down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the right front passenger’s air bag is turned
off for a person who isn’t in a risk group
identified by the national government, that
person won’t have the extra protection of an
air bag. In a crash, the air bagwouldn’t be able
to inflate and help protect the person sitting
there. Don’t turn off the passenger’s air bag
unless the person sitting there is in a risk
group. See “Air Bag Off Switch” in the Index
for more on this, including important safety
information.
1-63
Air Bag System
This part explains the air bag system.
I
If it says AIR BAG on the middle part of the steering
wheel and AIR BAG on the instrument panel in front of
the right front passenger’s seat, your vehicle has
two air bags - one air bag for the driver and another
air bag for the right front passenger.
If it says AIR BAG on the middle part of the steering
wheel but it doesn’t say AIR BAG on the instrument
panel in front of the right front passenger’s seat, your
vehicle has an air bag for the driver only.
If it says AIR BAG on the middle part of the steering
wheel, but there is no right front passenger seat,
your vehicle has an air bag for the driver only.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating air bag. But these
air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job
and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag system:
1-64
i
~
a
can
l ut: severely injured or killGd in a crash
if you aren’t wearing your safety belt - even if
you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chanceof
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Air bags are designed to work
with safety belts, but don’t replace them. Air
bags are designed to deploy onlyin moderate
to severe frontal and near frontal crashes.
They aren’t designed to inflate at allin rollover,
rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in many
side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, air bags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more
forceful air bags have provided in the past.
Everyone in your vehicle shouldwear a safety
belt properly - whether or not there’s an air
bag for that person.
Air bags infla,, wit.. great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an
inflating air bag, as you would be if you were
leaning forward, it could seriously injure you.
Safety belts help keep you in position before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with air bags. The driver should sit
as far back as possible while still maintaining
control of the vehicle.
1-65
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-27
for more information.
Anyone who is up against, or very closeto,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle.To read how,
see the parts of this manual called “Older
Children” and “Infants and Young Children”.
Where Are the Air Bags?
There is a air bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the air bag symbol.
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.
1-66
If your vehicle has one, the right front passenger’s air
bag is in the instrument pan on the
passenger’s side.
an
If something is between an occupant
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly orit
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering.
-~~.-.
1-67
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
Single Stage Air Bags
An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal, or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.”
If your vehicle has frontal air bags with single stage
deployment and your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is about
12 to 16 mph (19 to 26 km/h). The threshold level can
vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can
be somewhat above or below this range. If your
vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such
as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher.
The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not help the occupant.
If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) of your
vehicle is 8600 or above, your vehicle has single stage
air bags. If the GVWR is below 8600 then your
vehicle has dual stage air bags. You can find the GVWR
on the certification label on the rear edge of the
driver’s door. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30
for more information.
1-68
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact
and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or
near-frontal impacts.
Dual Stage Air Bags
Seat Position Sensors
If your vehicle has frontal air bags with dual stage
deployment, the amount of restraint will adjust according
to the crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts,
these air bags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment
occurs. If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a
wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level for
the reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph
(19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
deployment is about 16 to 25 mph (26 to 40 km/h). The
threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above or
below this range.
Vehicles with dual stage air bags are also equipped with
special sensors which enable the sensing system to
monitor the position of both the driver and passenger
front seats. The seat position sensors provide
information which is used to determine if the air bags
should deploy at a reduced level or at full depoyment.
If your vehicle strikes something that will move or
deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be
higher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear
impacts, or many side impacts because inflation would
not help the occupant.
Air Bag Systems
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact
and how quickly the vehicle slows down in front or
near-frontal impacts.
1-69
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The
sensing system triggers a release of gas from the
inflator, which inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag,
and related hardware are all part of the air bag
modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument
panel in front of the right front passenger.
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the
protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually.
But air bags would not help you in many types of
collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is
not toward those air bags. Air bags should never be
regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety
belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal collisions.
1-70
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module - the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
bag - will be hot for a short time. The parts of the bag
that come into contact with you may be warm, but
not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust
coming from the vents in the deflated air bags. Air
bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or
being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop
people from leaving the vehicle.
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an air bag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
I
0
Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After
they inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your
air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air
bag system won’t be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include air
bag modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to
replace other parts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module, which records information
about the air bag system. The module records
information about the readiness of the system, when
the system commands air bag inflation and
driver’s safety belt usage at deployment. The
module also records speed, engine rpm, brake and
throttle data.
0
Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
system. Improper service can mean that your air
bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer for
service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s air bag, the bag
may not work properly. You may have to replace the
air bag module in the steering wheel or both the
air bag module and the instrument panel for
the right front passenger’s air bag. Do not open or
break the air bag coverings.
1-71
Air Bag Off Switch
If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) of your
vehicle is 8600 or above, your vehicle has an air bag off
switch. You can find the GVWR on the certificationhire
label on the rear edge of the driver’s door. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-30 for more information.
You can use the air bag off switch on the instrument
panel to turn off the right front passenger’s air bag.
This switch should only be turned to AIR BAG OFF if the
person in the right front passenger’s position is a
member of a passenger risk group identified by the
national government as follows:
1-72
Infant. An infant (less than 7 year old) must
ride in the front seat because:
my vehicle has no rear seat;
my vehicle has a rear seat too small tu
accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or
the infant has a medical condition which, according
to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
Child age 1 to 12. A child age 7 to 72 must
ride in the front seat because:
0
my vehicle has no rear seat;
although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear
seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12
sometimes must ride in thefront because no space is
available in the rearseat(s) of my vehicle; or
the child has a medical condition which, according to
the child’s physician, makes it necessary for thechild
to ride in the front seat so that the driver can
constantly monitor the child’s condition.
1-73
Medical Condition. A passenger has a
medical condition which, according to his or
her physician:
causes the passenger air bag to pose a special risk
for the passenger; and
makes the potential harm from the passenger air
bag in a crash greater than the potential harm
from turning off the air bag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or
windshield in a crash.
If the right front passenger’s air bag is turned
off for a person who isn’t in a risk group
identified by the national government, that
person won’t have the extra protection of an
air bag. In a crash, the air bag wouldn’t be able
to inflate and help protect the person sitting
there. Don’t turn off the passenger’s air bag
unless the person sitting there is in a risk
group. See “Air Bag Off Switch’’ in the Index.
1-74
To turn off the right front passenger’s air bag, insert
your ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the
switch to AIR BAG OFF.
The AIR BAG OFF light will come on to let you know
that the right front passenger’s air bag is off. The
right front passenger’s air bag will remain off until you
turn it back on again, and the AIR BAG OFF light
will stay on to remind you that the air bag is off.
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the air bag, it means
that something may be wrong with the air bag
system. The right front passenger's air bag
could inflate even though the switch is off. If
this ever happens, don't let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a
member of a passenger air bag risk group sit
in the right front passenger's position (for
example, don't secure a rear-facing child
restraint in your vehicle) until you have your
vehicle serviced.
To turn the right front passenger's air bag on again,
insert your ignition key into the switch, push in,
and move the switch to the on position.
1-75
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag system in several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To
purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
Or”- .-‘-- ‘Tformation on page 7-10.
Adding Equipment to Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: If I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to the
front of my vehicle, will it keep the air bags
from working properly?
A: As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is
attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle’s
basic structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep
the air bags from working properly in a crash.
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front of the
For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
air bag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close to
an air bag when it inflates. Avoid wires
wrapped with yellow tape or yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the air
bag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to doso.
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-76
vehicle that could keep the air bags from
working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or
height, they may keep the air bag system from
working properly. Also, the air bag system may not
work properly if you relocate any of the air bag
sensors. If you have any questions about this, you
should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure on
page 7-2.
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired OF repfaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-77
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Cra-’1
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death ina
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
1-78
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH
system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt, safety belt pretensioner or seat parts
repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the belt or LATCH system wasn’t
being used at the time of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier
in this section.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ............................................................... 2.2
Remote Keyless Entry System ........................ -2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2.4
Doors and Locks ............................................. 2.7
Door Locks .................................................... 2.7
Power Door Locks .......................................... 2.8
Last Door Closed Locking ................................ 2.8
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2.9
Lockout Protection ........................................ 2.10
Sliding Side Door .......................................... 2-1 1
60/40 Swing-Out Side Door ............................ 2.13
Rear Doors .................................................. 2.14
Windows .................................................... 2.16
.......
........................ 2.16
Manual
Windows
Power Windows ........................................ 2-17
.................... 2.18
Swing-Out Windows .......
Sun Visors ................................................ 2.18
Theft-Deterrent Systems .................................. 2.19
[email protected] ................................................... 2.19
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2.20
New Vehicle Break-In .................................... 2.20
Ignition Positions ..........
................. 2-20
Starting Your Engine ..................................... 2.21
Engine Coolant Heater .................................. 2.22
Automatic Transmission Operation ................... 2.24
All-Wheel Drive ............................................ 2.26
Parking Brake .............................................. 2-26
Shifting Into Park (P) ..................................... 2-27
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................. 2-29
Parking Over Things That Burn ....................... 2-30
Engine Exhaust ............................................ 2-30
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....2-31
Mirrors ........................................................... 2-32
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................. 2-32
Outside Manual Mirror ................................... 2-32
Outside Remote Control Mirror ....................... 2-32
Outside Camper-Type Mirrors ......................... 2-33
Outside Power Mirrors ................................... 2-34
Outside Convex Mirror ................................... 2-35
Outside Heated Mirrors .................................. 2-35
[email protected] System ............................................ 2-36
Storage Areas ................................................ 2-38
2- 1
Keys
2-2
This vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition and door locks.
It will fit with either side up.
Notices Your vehicle has a number of features
that can help prevent theft. You can have a lot
of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever
lock your keys inside. You may even have to
damage your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have
spare keys.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call GM
Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 7-5.
Remote Keyless Entry System
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer
provides the owner with a pair of identical keys and a
bar-coded tag.
The bar-coded tag has a code on it that tells your
dealer or a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys.
Keep this tag in a safe place. If you lose your keys,
you’ll be able to have new ones made easily using
this tag.
If equipped, the remote keyless entry system operates
on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-3
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
Your vehicle may have this feature.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
c
Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
Check to determine if battery replacement or
resynchronization is necessary. See “Battery
Replacement’’ and “Resynchronization” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-4.
If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
2-4
8 (Lock):
Pressing this button once will lock all of the
doors. The parking lamps will flash and the interior
lamps will turn on briefly. Press LOCK again within five
seconds and the parking lamps will flash and the
horn will chirp briefly.
& (Unlock): Pressing this button once will unlock the
driver’s door. The parking lamps will flash twice and
the interior lamps will turn on. Press UNLOCK
again within five seconds to unlock the remaining doors.
The parking lamps will flash.
& (Panic Alarm):
The remote keyless entry transmitter
comes equipped with an instant panic alarm. To use
the alarm, press the horn symbol when the ignition
is turned off. The horn will sound and both the interior
and exterior lamps will flash for up to thirty seconds. To
stop the instant panic alarm, press the panic button
again, wait for thirty seconds, or start the vehicle.
f4
(Cargo Door): Press this button to unlock the cargo
doors only.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
Resynchronization
Resynchronization may be necessary due to the
security method used by this system. The transmitter
does not send the same signal twice to the receiver. The
receiver will not respond to a signal that has been
sent previously. This prevents anyone from recording
and playing back the signal from the transmitter.
To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to your
vehicle and press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK
buttons on the transmitter at the same time for seven
seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirm
synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your
dealer for service.
2-5
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
TO replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter,
do the following:
1. Use an object like a coin to pry open the transmitter.
2. Once the transmitter is separated, use an object
like a pencil to remove the old battery. Do not use
a metal object.
3. Remove and replace the battery, positive (+)
side down.
4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure
no moisture can enter.
5. Press and hold LOCK and UNLOCK on the remote
keyless entry transmitter for seven seconds to
resynchronize the transmitter.
6. Check the operation of the transmitter.
2-6
Doors and Locks
Dc
-
-
'x-'--
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with keyless entry, see
Remote Keyless Entry System on page 2-3 for more
information.
From the outside, use your key.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers - especially children - can
easily open the doors and fall out ofa
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle won't open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors aren't locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
To lock the door from
the inside, slide the
manual lever on your door
down. To unlock the
door, slide the manual
lever up.
2-7
Power Door Locks
Last Door Closed Locking
This feature protects the owner from having an
unsecured side cargo door. If the side cargo door is
open when the lock button is pressed on the door or the
remote keyless entry transmitter, all doors will lock
and then re-lock again after the cargo door is closed. If
the cargo door is not closed within several minutes,
the re-lock will not occur.
Press the bottom side of the power door lock switch to
lock all the doors at once. Press the top side of the
power door lock switch to unlock all the doors at once.
When a door is locked, the inside door handle will
not work.
2-8
Move the button to the left
to engage the security
feature. Move the button to
the right to return the
door locks to normal
operation.
Rear Door Security Locks
Security locks are located on the passenger side rear
door, the side sliding door or the front portion of
the 60/40 side swing-out door.
With this feature, you can
lock these doors so they
can’t be opened from
the inside by passengers.
Right-hand 60/40
Swing-Out Side Door
w
Rear Cargo Door
Move the lever down to engage the security feature.
Move the lever up to return the door locks to normal
operation.
2-9
I
.
0
rc
ii;
s
Q
rc
S
0
z
0
0
.d
0
O
Y-
To open the sliding door from inside, turn the handle
upward and toward the rear of the vehicle. Then, slide
the door toward the rear of the vehicle to open it.
To close the sliding door from inside, grasp the inside
handle and slide the door toward the front of the vehicle
to a closed position.
Make sure the door is completely closed before
driving away.
2-12
60/40Swing-Out Side Door
To open the front portion of a 60/40 door from the
outside, pull out on the handle and pull it toward you.
To open the front portion of a 60/40 door from the
inside, pull the handle toward you and push open
the door.
2-13
Rear Dc-urn
To open the rear portion of a 60/40 door from the
outside, pull the handle on the side of the rear door and
pull it toward you.
To close the 60/40 side doors, close the rear door first.
Then close the front door. Check to make sure that
both doors are completely closed.
The front side swing-out door has a check strap
assembly in the door frame to keep the door from
opening beyond 90 degrees.
To open the door beyond 90 degrees, close the door
partially, pull the check strap toward you and then open
the door. When you close the door, the check strap
will automatically re-engage.
2-14
Unlockel. Joors cat. Je c-.lgerous.
Passengers - especially children - can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle won’t open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown outof the vehicle
in a crash if the doors aren’t locked.So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out.A child
can be overcome by extremeheat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
To open the rear doors from the outside, pull the
handle toward you to open the passenger's side rear
door first.
To open the driver's side rear door, pull the latch
release at the inside edge of the door.
To close the rear doors, close the driver side rear door
first. Then, close the passenger side rear door.
Check to make sure both doors are completely closed.
2-15
Windows
Leaving chiraren in a vehicle with the windows
closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome
by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never
leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or hot weather.
Manual Windows
To operate your manual windows, turn the hand crank
on each door to raise or lower your side door windows.
2-16
Power Windows
The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger
window as well. Your power windows will work when the
ignition has been turned to RUN or ACCESSORY, or
when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
See Ignition Positions on page 2-20.
Press the rear of the switch with the power window
symbol on it to lower the window.
Press the front of the switch with the power window
symbol on it to raise the window.
The driver’s window switch also has an express-down
feature that allows the window to be lowered without
holding the switch. Press and hold the side of the
window switch marked AUTO for one second to activate
the express-down mode. The express-down mode
can be cancelled at any time by pressing the opposite
side of the switch. To open the window part way,
lightly tap the switch until the window is at the desired
position.
2-17
<
5
(D
o_
s
(D
e
0
s
S
rc
0
(P
3
I
.
v)
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is a big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.
[email protected]
Your vehicle is equipped with the [email protected]
theft-deterrent system.
[email protected] is a passive theft-deterrent system.
[email protected] enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is
turned with a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the
ignition lock cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.
During normal operation, the SECURITY light will go
off approximately five seconds after the key is turned
to RUN.
If the engine stalls and the SECURITY light flashes,
wait until the light stops flashing before trying to restart
the engine. Remember to release the key from
START as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine is running and the SECURITY light comes
on, you will be able to restart the engine if you turn
the engine off. However, your [email protected] system is not
working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by [email protected] at
this time. You may also want to check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-96. See your
dealer for service.
2-19
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
Ignition Positions
C
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t drive at any one speed - fast or
slow - for the first 500 miles (805 km). Don’t
make full-throttle starts.
Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322km) or so. During this time your new
brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
Don’t tow a trailer during break-in. See “Towing
a Trailer” in the Index for more information.
2-20
Use the key to turn the ignition switch to four different
positions.
A (LOCK): This position locks the ignition and
transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent feature. You will only
be able to remove the key when the ignition is turned
to LOCK.
Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you
can’t turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if
so, is it all the way in? Turn the key only with
your hand. Using a tool to forceit could break the
key or the ignition switch. If none
of these works,
then your vehicle needs service.
B (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use things like
the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine
is off.
Notice: Don’t operate accessories in the
ACCESSORY position for long periodsof time.
Prolonged operation of accessories in the
ACCESSORY position could drain your battery and
prevent you from starting your vehicle.
C (RUN): This is the position for driving.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) feature which will allow certain features of
your vehicle to continue to work up to 10 minutes
after the ignition key is turned to LOCK.
Your radio and power windows will work when the
ignition key is in RUN or ACCESSORY. Once the key is
turned from RUN to LOCK, these features will continue
to work for up to 10 minutes or until a door is opened.
Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position - that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you
hold the ignition key in START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator
pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
2-21
When starting your engine in very cold weather
(below 0°F or -18"CI. do this:
, I
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there up to
15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go of
the key.
2. If your engine still won't start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing, but this time keep the pedal down
for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before addingelectrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you don't, your engine
might not perform properly.
2-22
Fuel Regulator
You have a fuel regulator that shuts the fuel off when
the engine reaches 5,600 rpm.
Engine Coolant Heater
In very cold weather, 0°F (-18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You'll get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
At temperatures above 32°F (OOC), use of the coolant
heater is not required.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord for the engine coolant heater is located
on the driver’s side of the engine compartment and
is attached to the hose for the power steering
reservoir.
3. PI
it into a normal, grounded 110-vol
C outlet.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
L .Agging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord
won’t reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
2-23
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It’s
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle can’t move easily.
1
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the
shift lever is not fully in PARK(P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See “Shifting Into Park (P)” in the
Index. If you’re pulling a trailer,see “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index.
2-24
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transmission
shift lock control system. With the ignition in RUN,
you must fully apply your regular brakes before you can
shift from PARK (P).
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way
into PARK (P) as you continue pressing the brake pedal.
Then move the shift lever into the gear you want. See
Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 2-29.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage your transmission.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
see If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-28.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you
need more power for passing, and you’re:
Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NE1
L (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
IT-
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
I
I
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
“racing” (running at high speed) is dangerous.
Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal,
your vehicle could move very rapidly. You
could lose control and hit people or objects.
Don’t shift into a drive gear while your engine
is racing.
Notice: Damage to your transmission caused by
shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with
the engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than DRIVE (D). You should use THIRD ( 3 )
when carrying a heavy load or driving on steep hills.
You should use THIRD (3) (or, as you need to, a lower
gear) when towing a trailer to minimize heat build-up
and extend the life of your transmission.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, but then you
would also want to use your brakes off and on. If you
manually select SECOND (2), the transmission will drive
in SECOND (2). You may use this feature for reducing
torque to the rear wheels when you are trying to
start your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
2-25
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST ( I ) , the transmission
won’t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly
enough.
Notice: If your wheels won’t turn, don’t try to drive.
This might happen if you were stuck in very deep
sand or mud or were up against a solid object. You
could damage your transmission. Also, if you
stop when going uphill, don’t hold your vehicle there
with only the accelerator pedal. This could overheat
and damage the transmission. Use your brakes
or shift into PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in
position on a hill.
All-Wheel Drive
If your vehicle has all-wheel drive, your engine’s driving
power is sent to all four wheels for extra traction
when needed.
This is like four-wheel drive, but there is no separate
lever or switch to engage or disengage the front axle. It
is fully automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for
road conditions.
You may experience a brief vehicle vibration upon
acceleration when driving in slippery conditions. This is
normal and is an indication that the all-wheel drive
system is functioning properly.
2-26
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking
brake pedal with your left foot.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
come on.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the handle, located just above
the parking brake pedal, marked BRAKE RELEASE to
release the parking brake.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
cause your rear brakes to overheat. You may have
to replace them, and you could also damage
other parts of your vehicle. Always check to be
sure your parking brake is fully released before
you drive.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-32. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like
Shifting Into Park (P)
this:
I
It can be dangerous to get -.t of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t
move, even when you’re on fairly level ground,
use the steps that follow.If you’re pulling a
trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
1-
1
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right
set the parking brake.
foot and
Pull the lever toward you.
2-27
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
F--nning
Move the lever up as far as it will go.
It can be dangerous toleave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Don’t leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
3. Move the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-28
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift lever to PARK (P), hold
the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can
move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first
pulling it toward you. If you can, it means that the
shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque
lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting
Into Park (P) on page 2-27.
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in RUN. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 2-24.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then,
move the shift lever into the gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift
out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.
2-29
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhr-’.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
Repairs weren’t done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things
that can burn.
2-30
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
.
cline.,.
control
d n g the engine w , ~ . the
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust.”
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even
if the fan is at the highest setting. One place
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust - with
CO - can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See “Winter Driving” in the Index.
It G,.I be dan=-.--- to get out of 1 -4r veh---e
if the shift lever is not fullyin PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even
when you’re on fairly level ground, always
set your parking brake and move the shift
lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-27.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-32.
2-31
Mirrors
Outside Remote Control Mirror
Manual Rearview Mirror
If your vehicle has power mirrors, they can be adjusted
from inside the vehicle.
Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror
If you have a cargo van without the rear door glass,
your vehicle may not have a rearview mirror.
Pull the tab under the mirror toward you to reduce glare
from headlamps behind you after dark. Push the tab
away from you to restore the mirror to the original
position.
Select the mirror you want
to move by turning the
knob clockwise to adjust
the passenger’s side mirror
and counterclockwise to
adjust the driver’s side
mirror. The center position
is neutral.
Outside Manual Mirror
Adjust your outside mirrors so you can see a little of the
side of your vehicle, and have a clear view of objects
behind you. Some mirrors can be folded in to enter
narrow passageways.
2-32
Then, adjust the mirror angle by pushing the knob in the
direction desired until the mirror is adjusted to where
you want it.
Outside Camper-Type Mirrors
If your vehicle is equipped
with the camper-type
mirrors, they can be
adjusted so you can have
a clear view of any
objects behind you.
1. To adjust the mirrors
when towing a trailer,
turn the mirror by
pushing the mirror
head toward the front
of the vehicle.
2-33
2. Turn the mirror head
so that it swings further
outboard and adjust
the mirror surface
as needed.
Outside Power Mirrors
If you have power mirrors, they can be adjusted from
inside the vehicle.
Select the mirror you want
to move by turning the
knob clockwise to adjust
the passenger’s side mirror
and counterclockwise to
adjust the driver’s side
mirror. The center position
is neutral.
Then, adjust the mirror angle by pushing the knob in the
direction desired until the mirror is adjusted to where
you want it.
2-34
Outside Convex Mirror
Outside Heated Mirrors
Your passenger’s side mirror may be convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from
the dri T’S seat.
Your outside mirrors can
be defrosted by pressing
the button located near the
fan control.
I
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
I
An indicator light in the button will light anytime the
heated outside mirrors are activated.
Your rear window defogger comes on whenever the
heated mirrors are on. If your vehicle has a rear window
defogger, see “Rear Window Defogger’’ in Climate
Control System on page 3- 17.
2-35
[email protected] System
[email protected] Services
[email protected] provides a number of service plans. Some of
the services currently provided by [email protected] are:
8
Your vehicle may be equipped with the [email protected]
System. [email protected] uses global positioning system (GPS)
satellite technology, wireless communications, and
call centers to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information and convenience services. An
[email protected] subscription plan is included in the price of
your vehicle. You can upgrade or extend your [email protected]
services to meet your needs.
A complete [email protected] user’s guide and the terms and
conditions of the [email protected] Subscription Service
Agreement are included in your vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com,
contact [email protected] at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827),
or press the blue [email protected] button to speak to an
[email protected] advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
2-36
8
a
Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment
a
Emergency Services
a
Roadside Assistance Stolen Vehicle Tracking
a
AccidentAssist
a
Remote Door Unlock
a
Remote Diagnostics
a
[email protected] MED-NET (Requires separate activation
and annual fee on some plans)
Online and Personal Concierge Services
Route Support
RideAssist
Information and Convenience Services
[email protected] Personal Calling
[email protected] VirtualAdvisor
With OnSta? Personal Calling, you have a safer way
to stay connected while driving. It’s a hands-free
wireless phone that’s integrated into your vehicle. You
can place calls nationwide using voice-activated
dialing with no contracts, no roaming charges and no
access fees. To find out more about [email protected] Personal
Calling, refer to the [email protected] user’s guide in your
vehicle’s glove box, or call [email protected] at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
With [email protected] Virtual Advisor you can listen to the
news, entertainment and informative topics, such as
traffic and weather reports. You are able to listen
and reply to your e-mail through your vehicle’s speakers.
A completed Subscription Service Agreement is
required prior to delivery of [email protected] services and
prepaid calling minutes are also required for [email protected]
Personal Calling and [email protected] Virtual Advisor use.
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com.
2-37
Storage Areas
Your front storage compartment is at the center of the
instrument panel extension, by the floor. To open
the compartment, press down on the inside portion of
the handle. The compartment will open automatically.
Storage compartments may also be included on
the inside of each front door.
2-38
3
Instrument Panel
Instrument
Overview
Panel
...
.....3.2
........
.....3.4
Hazard
Warning
Flashers
Other Warning Devices ................................... 3.5
Horn ............................................................. 3.5
Tilt Wheel ..................................................... 3.5
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever ......................... 3.6
Exterior Lamps ............................................. 3.12
Interior Lamps .............................................. 3.14
Accessory Power Outlets ............................... 3.16
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................ 3.16
Climate Controls ............................................ 3.17
Climate Control System ................................. 3.17
Rear Heating System .................................... 3.18
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System .......3-19
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators .............3.23
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................ 3.24
Speedometer ............................................... 3.25
Safety Belt Reminder Light ............................. 3.26
Air Bag Readiness Light ................................ 3-27
Air Bag Off Light .......................................... 3.28
Charging System Light .................................. 3.29
Voltmeter Gage ............................................ 3.30
Brake System Warning Light .......................... 3.31
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ............. 3.32
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3.32
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................. 3.33
........3.36
Oil Pressure Gage .....................
Change Engine Oil Light ................................ 3-37
Security Light ............................................... 3.37
Cruise Control Light ...................................... 3-38
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ........... 3-38
Tow/Haul Mode Light .................................... 3-38
Check Gages Warning Light ........................... 3-38
Fuel Gage ................................................... 3-39
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-40
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems (RDS) .................................. 3-40
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio
Data Systems (RDS) .................................. 3-41
AM-FM Radio ............................................... 3-41
Radio with CD (Base Level) ........................... 3-44
Radio with Cassette and CD .......................... 3-48
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................. 3-59
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................. 3-69
Theft-Deterrent Feature (Non-RDS Radios) .......3-71
Theft-Deterrent Feature (RDS Radios) .............3-71
Understanding Radio Reception ...................... 3-71
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player .................3-72
Care of Your CDs ......................................... 3-73
Care of Your CD Player ................................ 3-73
Fixed Mast Antenna ...................................... 3-73
Chime Level Adjustment .....
............3-73
3- 1
Instrument Panel Overview
A
B
C
D
A
E
F
A
A
I
G
H
I
J
K
J
I-he main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Air Outlets
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
Instrument Panel Cluster
ShiftLever
Climate Control System
AudioSystem
G. Headlamp and Parking Lamp Controls
H. Tow/Haul Mode Button
I. Rear Heating System (If Equipped)
J. Accessory Power Outlets/Cigarette Lighter
K. Storage Compartment
3-3
The hazard warning
flasher button is located at
the top of the steering
column.
Hazard Warning Flashers
I
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
3-4
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Other Warning Devices
Tilt Wheel
If you carry reflective triangles, you can use them to
warn others. Set one up at the side of the road about
300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.
A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive. You can also raise it to the
highest level to give your legs more room when
you enter and exit the vehicle.
Horn
The lever is located on the lower left side of the steering
column.
Press the horn symbol in the middle of the steering
wheel to sound the horn.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable
level, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
3-5
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
Turn and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
Turn and Lane Change Signals
HeadlampHigh/Low Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass Feature
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control
For information on the exterior lamps, see Exterior
Lamps on page 3-72later in this section.
3-6
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
If you move the lever all the way up or down, and the
arrow flashes at twice the normal rate, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers may not see your
turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check for burned-out bulbs or a blown fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-96.
Turn Signal On Chime
Flash-To-Pass Feature
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal
lever to the off position.
This feature allows you to use your high-beam
headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you
want to pass. It works even if your headlamps are off.
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
io
(Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer): To
change the headlamps from low to high beam, pull the
mutlifunction lever all the way toward you. Then
release it.
When the high beams are
on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
also will be on.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, but not SO
far that you hear it click.
If your headlamps are off or on low-beam, your
high-beam headlamps will turn on and stay on as long
as you hold the lever toward you and the high-beam
indicator on the instrument panel will come on. Release
the lever to turn the high-beam headlamps off.
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
(Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to
mist. Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go. The
wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more
wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
(Delay): You can set the wiper speed for a long or
short delay between wipes. This can be very useful
in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay
time. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorter
the delay.
3-7
-(Low
Speed): For steady wiping at low speed,
turn the band away from you to the first solid band past
the delay settings. position. For high-speed wiping,
turn the band further, to the second solid band past the
delay settings. To stop the wipers, move the band to
off position.
0 (High Speed): For
high-speed wiping, turn the
band further, to the second solid band past the
delay settings.
o
(Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
3-8
Windshield Washer
6(Washer Fluid): There
is a paddle marked with the
windshield washer symbol at the topof the multifunction
lever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push
the paddle. The wipers will clear the window and then
either stop or return to your preset speed.
I
’reezing we--.ler, on’t use yourwasher
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
Cruise Control
Your vehicle may have cruise control.
0(Off): This position
turns the system off.
I
I (On): This position activates the system.
-/ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this symbol
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a
previously set speed.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will
disengage.
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you can’t drive safely at a steady speed.
So, don’t use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
needless wheel spinning, and you could
lose control. Don’t use cruise control on
slippery roads.
(Set): Press this button to set the speed.
3-9
Resuming a Set Speed
uise Control
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need to
reset it.
If you leave your cruise cont
or- -!hen 1 - J r e
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you don’t want to. You could
be startled and even lose control. Keep the
cruise control switch off until you want to use
cruise control.
~
~
1. Move the cruise control switch to on
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The cruise light on the instrument panel will illuminate
when the cruise control is engaged.
3-10
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch from on to
resume/accelerate briefly.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate briefly, the
vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch
or apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster,
don’t hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When vou take vour foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow dAwn to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
0
0
Usetheaccelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator
pedal.You’llnow
cruise at the higher speed.
Move the cruise switch from on to
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to
the speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch to resume/accelerate briefly. Each
time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
0
0
Press and hold the set button at the end of the
lever until you reach the lower speed you want, then
release it.
To slow down in very small amounts, press the set
button briefly. Each time you do this, you’ll go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well vour cruise control will work on hills depends
upon youispeed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
Step lightly on the brake pedal,
0
or move the cruise control switch to off.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-11
%f
Exterior Lamps
The control on the driver’s
side of your instrument
panel operates the exterior
lamps. Turn the control
clockwise to operate
the lamps.
(Parking Lamps): Turning the control to this
position turns on the parking lamps, together with the
following:
Instrument Panel Lights
Daytime Running Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Ashtray Lamp
If the DRLs are active when the control is turned to this
position, the DRLs will turn off.
The exterior lamp control has four positions:
0 (Defeat): Turn and release the control to this position
to turn off the DRLs. To turn them back on, turn and
release the control to this position. Shutting the vehicle
off and restarting it will also reactivate the DRLs.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the DRLs will remain
active along with the lamps mentioned above.
20
(Headlamps): Turning the control to this position
will turn on the headlamps together with the parking
lamps and turn off the daytime running lamps.
This feature is not available on vehicles first sold in
Canada.
You can switch your headlamps from high to low-beam
by pulling the turn signaVhigh-beam lever toward you.
zo (Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)): Turning the
A circuit breaker protects your headlamps. If you have
an electrical overload, your headlamps will flicker on
and off. Have your headlamp wiring checked right away
if this happens.
control to this position selects the DRLs. When the
vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P), the instrument panel
lamps will illuminate and the DRLs will turn on, unless
defeated. When the DRLs are active, the DRL indicator
will illuminate.
3-12
Lamps
Reminder
On
A reminder chime will sound when your control is turned
to the headlamps or parking lamps position, your key
isout of the ignition, and your driver’s door is open. To
disable
the
chime, turn the control to the Daytime
Running Lamp (DRL) position and then back to the
parking lamps or headlamps position.
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will come
when
on
conditions are met:
the following
the ignition is on,
the exterior lamps control in DRL mode and not in
the defeat position.
When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be
on. The instrument panel will be lit.
When you turn the headlamp switch off, the headlamps
will go off, and your DRL lamps will illuminate.
Turn the exterior lamp control to the defeat position or
shift into PARK (P). The DRLs will stay off until the
control is toggled again or the vehicle is shifted out
of PARK (P).
This procedure applies only to vehicles first sold in the
United States.
3-13
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness Control
Press this knob located
next to the exterior lamps
knob to extend and
turn it to make your
instrument panel brighter.
Turn the knob all the
way up to turn on
the interior lamps. Press
the knob back into its
stored position.
Your vehicle’s center high-mounted stoplamp is located
above the rear doors at the center of the vehicle.
If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle, as in a
luggage carrier, care should be taken not to block
or damage the center high-mounted stoplamp unit.
3-14
Dome Lamp Override
You can use the dome
override button, located
below the exterior
lamps knob, to set the
dome lamps to come on
automatically when a
door is opened, or
to remain off.
Entry Lighting
Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry
feature.
When a door is opened, the dome iamps will come on if
the dome override button is in the out position. I f the
dome override button is pressed in, the lamps will
not come on. When the door is closed, the interior lamps
will remain on for a period of fifteen seconds or until
the vehicle is started.
Reading Lamps
To turn the lamps off press the button. The dome lamps
will remain off when a door is open. To return the
lamps to automatic operation, press the button again.
The dome lamps will come on when you open a
door. This will override the illuminated entry feature
unless you use your keyless entry transmitter to unlock
the vehicle.
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on for a
period of forty seconds when you remove the key
from the ignition. The lights will not come on if the dome
override button is pressed in.
To turn on the reading lamps, press the button
located next to each lamp. To turn them off, press the
button again.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps will come on when you open a door.
You can use the dome override button, located
below the exterior lamps control, to set the dome lamps
to come on automatically when the doors are opened,
or remain off. To turn the lamps off, press the button into
the in position. With the button in this position, the
dome lamps will remain off when the doors are open.
To return the lamps to automatic operation, press
the button again and return it to the out position. With
the button in this position, the dome lamps will come on
when you open a door.
3-15
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the exterior and interior lamps if
they are left on after the ignition is turned off. All exterior
lamps will shut off after ten minutes. Interior cargo
lamps will shut down after twenty minutes and all other
interior lamps after ten minutes.
Accessory Power Outlets
Your vehicle may have accessory power outlets.
You can plug accessory electrical equipment into an
accessory power outlet. Just pull on the outlet cover to
remove it and follow the proper installation instructions
that are included with any electrical equipment that
you install.
The accessory power outlets are located on the driver’s
and passenger’s side of the front storage compartment.
These circuits are protected by a fuse and have
maximum current levels.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible
to the power accessory outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information on
the power accessory plugs.
3-16
Notice: When
using
an accessory
power
outlet,
maximum electrical load must not exceed20 amps.
Always turn off any electrical equipment when
not in use. Leaving electrical equipment on for
extendedperiodswilldrainyourbattery.
Notice: Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory
or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper useof
the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your warranty.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have this feature. The front ashtray
can be placed in the instrument panel extension at
the center of the instrument panel. Lift up on the ashtray
door to open it.
Notice: Don’t put papers or other flammable
items into your ashtrays. Hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them, causing
a damaging fire.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way and let
go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your
hand while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to
back away from the heating element when it’s
ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the
lighter and the heatingelement.
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
2
(Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
+2(Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately half of
the air to the instrument panel outlets, then directs
most of the remaining air to the floor outlets. Some air
may be directed toward the windshield.
(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the outboard
outlets (for the side windows) and some air directed to
the windshield.
;4
The right knob can also be used to select the defrost
mode. Information on defogging and defrosting can
be found later in this section.
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.
@
(Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed
3-17
If your vehicle has air conditioning, your heating/air
conditioning controls will look like this:
Rear Heating System
Your vehicle may have an optional rear heating system
that allows you to adjust the amount of air flowing
into the rear of the vehicle, from the front-seating area.
This feature works with the main climate-control
system in your vehicle.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
A
m
v
(Temperature Control): Turn the center knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside your vehicle.
0
A/C (Air Conditioning): This setting will begin to cool
and dehumidify the air inside of your vehicle.
MAX A/C (Maximum Air Conditioning): Turn the right
knob to MAX A/C for maximum cooling. This setting
cools the air the fastest, by recirculating the inside air.
AUX (Auxiliary Heating System): The thumbwheel for
this system is located to the right of the audio system.
@
(Fan): Turn the thumbwheel up or down to increase
or decrease the amount of heated air sent to the
rear-seating area.
0 (Off): Turn the thumbwheel to this position to turn
off the rear heating system.
3-18
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
System
Your vehicle may have a rear heating and
air-conditioning system. This system regulates the
temperature, the fan speed and the air delivery for the
rear-seat passengers only. It also works with the
main climate-control system in your vehicle.
Rear Climate-Control Panel
The rear control panel for this system is located in the
second row behind the driver in the rear of your vehicle.
A rear-seat passenger can use this control panel to
personally adjust the temperature, the direction of the
airflow and the fan speed for the rear-seating area.
Front Climate-Control Panel
Use this control panel when you would like to maintain
a separate temperature setting. Adjust the direction
of the airflow or adjust the fan speed for the rear-seat
passenger(s).
The fan knob located on the front climate control panel
must be turned to REAR CNTL to allow a rear-seat
passenger to use the control panel in the rear-seating
area. Performing this action disables the front control
panel. To return control to this panel, move the fan knob
out of REAR CNTL.
3-19
Directing the Airflow
Setting the Temperature
Turn the center knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to change the direction of the airflow in the
rear-seating area.
To increase or decrease the temperature for the rear of
the vehicle, use the right knob located on the
climate-control panel.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
The air-conditioning system on the main climate-control
panel must be turned on to direct cooled air to the
rear of the vehicle. If it is not on, then the temperature
in the rear of the vehicle will remain at cabin
temperature.
2
(Vent): Use this mode to direct air to the upper
outlets, with a little air directed to the floor outlets.
*A(Floor):
Use this mode to direct most of the air to
the floor outlets.
Selecting the Fan Speed
@
(Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to HIGH, MED (Medium) or LOW to
increase or decrease the fan speed in the rear-seating
area. Turn the knob to OFF to turn off the fan.
3-20
Be sure to keep the area under the front seats clear of
any objects so that the air inside of your vehicle can
circulate effectively.
For information on how to use the main climate-control
system, see Climate Control System on page 3-17
listed previously in this section. For information
on ventilation, see “Outlet Adjustment” listed later in this
section.
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly.
Press this button to turn the rear window defogger on or
off. Be sure to clear as much snow from the window
as possibie.
Turn the knob on the right of the climate control panel
to select the defog or defrost mode.
+3(Blend): With this setting, the outside air comes out
of both the floor and defroster outlets. Adjust the
temperature knob for warmer or cooler air. The air
conditioning compressor may operate in this setting to
dehumidify the air.
(Defrost): This setting operates the defroster. Most
of the air comes out near the windshield, with some
going to the floor outlets and front side windows. The air
conditioning compressor may operate in this setting to
dehumidify the air.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window and will only
work when the ignition is RUN.
The rear window defogger will turn off several minutes
after the button is pressed. If turned on again, the
defogger will run for several more minutes before turning
off. The defogger can also be turned off by pressing
the button again or by turning off the engine.
Notice: Don’t use a razor blade or something else
sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you
do, you could cut or damage the defogger and the
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a
decal or anything similar to the defogger grid.
The blend setting is useful for cold weather with a large
number of passengers or very humid conditions to
help keep the windshield clear. Use defrost to remove
fog or ice from the windshield quickly in extremely
cold conditions. The temperature knob should be in the
red area and the fan control toward high.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear
3-21
Operation Tips
Outlet Adjustment
Use the outlets located
near the center and on
the sides of the instrument
panel to change the
direction of airflow.
Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
0
Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
3-22
Warning Lights, Gages and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the vvarni~glights cumes on and stays
on when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section
that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this
manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly - and even dangerous. So please get to know
your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
3-23
Speedometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. Laws vary as to the procedure
that must be followed, so check with your state or
provincial vehicle registration office. But generally, if the
new odometer can be set to the mileage total of the
old odometer, then it must be. But if it can’t, then it’s set
at zero, and a label must be put on the driver’s door
to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer
was installed.
3-25
Electronic Road-Speed Governor
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell
you how far your vehicle
has been driven since
you last set the trip
odometer to zero.
Your vehicle may have this feature. This system
automatically controls top vehicle speed. The system
controller receives a signal from the vehicle speed
sensor and reduces power when the vehicle speed
reaches the maximum 65 mph (105 km/h) governed
speed.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to R U N or START, a tone will
come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten
their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
To reset the trip odometer, fully press the reset button
located near the trip odometer readout.
The trip odometer can show either total miles or trip
miles using this button located on the instrument cluster.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the tone
nor the light will come on.
3-26
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the air bag sensor, the air
bag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag
system, see Air Bag System on page 1-64.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then
the light should go out.
This means the system
is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bagsin
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the air bag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air
bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-27
Air Bag Off Light
I
If your vehicle is equipped with an air bag off switch,
when you turn the right front passenger’s air bag off, the
air bag off light will come on and stay on to remind
you that the air bag has been turned off. This light will
go off when you turn the air bag back on again. See Air
Bag Off Switch on page 1-72for more on this, including
important safety information.
If the right front passenger’s air bagis turned
off for a person who isn’t in a risk group
identified by the national government, that
person won’t have the extra protection of an
air bag. In a crash, the air bag wouldn’tbe able
to inflate and help protect the personsitting
there.
L
3-28
Don’t turn off the passenger’s air bag unless
the person sitting there is in a risk group
identified by the national government.See “Air
Bag Off Switch’’ in the Index for more on this,
including important safety information.
Charging System Light
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the air bag, it means
that something may be wrong with the air bag
system. The right front passenger’s air bag
could inflate even though the switch is off. If
this ever happens, don’t let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a
member of a passenger air bag risk group
sit in the right front passenger’s position
(for example, don’t secure a rear-facing child
restraint in your vehicle) until you have your
vehicle serviced.
This light should come on
briefly when you turn on
the ignition, before starting
the engine, as a check
to show you it is working.
After the engine starts, the light should go out. If it stays
on or comes on while you are driving, you may have
a problem with your charging system. It could indicate a
problem with the generator drive belt, or some other
charging system problem. Have it checked right away.
Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with this light
on, it helps to turn off all your accessories, such as the
radio and air conditioner.
3-29
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition is
on (in the RUN position),
this gage shows your
battery’s state of charge in
DC volts.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading
in either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off
all unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between the
low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
3-30
Brake System Warning Light
With the ignition on, the brake system warning light will
come on when you set your parking brake. The light
wi!! stay or! if your parking brake doesn’t re!ease f ~ ! ! y .!f
it stays on after your parking brake is fully released,
it means you have a brake problem.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need
both parts working well.
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a
problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Yor ’ ’-‘Iicle on page 4-29.
~
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
BRAKE
United States
Canada
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped
carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.
3-31
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
- With the anti-lock brake
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay on for
several seconds. That’s
normal.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake
system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but
you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake
system warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock
brakes and there’s a problem with your regular
brakes. See “Brake System Warning Light” earlier in this
section.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If
the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-32
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves into the red area your engine is
too hot!
It means that your engine coolant has overheated. If
you have been operating your vehicle under normal
operating conditions, you should pull off the road, stop
your vehicle, and turn off the engine as soon as
possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-28.
Low Coolant Warning Light
LOW
COOLANT
1
United States
Canada
This message is displayed when the cooling system is
low on coolant.
The engine may overheat. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-24 and have your vehicle serviced as soon as
you can.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board Diagnostics
Second Generation) and is intended to assure that
emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of
the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
The check engine light comes on to indicate that
there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions
often will be indicated by the system before any
problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to
assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to comeon.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
3-33
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Light Flashing - A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center
diagnosis and service may be required.
Light On Steady - An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady’’ following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady’’ following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle
to your dealer or qualified service center for service.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
Avoiding hard accelerations.
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
Reducing vehicle speed.
3-34
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as staiiing after start-up, staliing
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check
the vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment
and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the eit-rission CGntrd
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the Check
Engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, see your dealer or qualified service
center to prepare the vehicle for inspection.
3-35
Oil Pressure Gage
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused
by a dangerously low oil level or other problem causing
low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as possible.
United States
Canada
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in
psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is
running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa
(kilopascals).
3-36
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can becomeso hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soonas possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
I
Notice: Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and is not covered by
your warranty.
I
Change Engine Oil Light
Security Light
This light is displayed
when the engine oil needs
to be changed.
SECURITY
I
I
United States
If this light is flashing, it indicates that the oil level is
low. When this light is on steady, it indicates the
oil needs to be changed soon.
Once the engine oil has been changed, the change
engine oil light must be reset. Until it is reset, the light
will be displayed when the engine is on. For more
information on resetting the system, see Engine Oil on
page 5- 14.
I
a
I
Canada
The light will stay on until the engine starts. If the light
flashes, the [email protected] System has entered a tamper
mode. If the vehicle fails to start, see [email protected]
on page 2-19.
If the light comes on continuously while driving and
stays on, there may be a problem with the PasslockB
System. Your vehicle will not be protected by
[email protected],and you should see your GM dealer.
3-37
Tow/HauI Mode Light
Cruise Control Light
This message is displayed
when the tow/haul mode
has been activated.
CRUISE
United States
TOW / HAUL
Canada
The cruise light comes on whenever you set your cruise
control. See “Cruise Control” under Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-6.
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator
Light
You have this light on the
instrument panel. It will
light whenever the DRL are
on. It is also a reminder
to turn on your headlamps
when driving at night.
I
For more information, see “Tow/Haul Mode” in Towing a
Trailer on page 4-32.
Check Gages Warning Light
CHECK
GAGES
United States
Canada
This light will come on briefly when you are starting the
engine.
3-38
If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving,
check your coolant temperature and engine oil
pressure gages to see if they are in the warning zones.
The gage will first indicate empty before you are out ot
fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as
possible.
Fuel Gage
Listed are four situations you may experience with your
fuel gage:
At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts
the gage reads full.
off before
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank's
capacity to fill the tank.
The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
United States
Canada
The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, tells you about
how much fuel you have left in your tank.
The gage doesn't go back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.
None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage.
3-39
Audio System(s)
Notice: Before you add any sound equipment to
your vehicle - like a tape player,CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio - be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very important to
do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine,
Delphi Electronics radio or other systems, and
even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment that
has been added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
four audio system has been designed to operate easily
and to give years of listening pleasure. You will get
the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with
it first. Find out what your audio system can do and
how to operate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting
the most out of the advanced engineering that went
into it.
Your vehicle may have a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your
audio system even after the ignition is turned off.
See “Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” under Ignition
Positions on page 2-20.
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RBS)
Press and hold the HR or MIN arrow for two seconds.
Then press the HR (down) arrow until the correct
hour appears on the display. Press and hold the
MIN (up) arrow until the correct minute appears on
the display. The time may be set with the ignition on
or off.
3-40
Setting the Time for Radios with
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
ANI-FM Radio
Your radio may have a button marked with an H or
HH to represent hours ana an M or MvlN to represent
minutes.
Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour
appears on the display. Press and hold the minute
button until the correct minute appears on the display.
The time may be set with the ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time until
RDS TIME appears on the display. To accept this
time, press and hold the hour and minute buttons, at the
same time, for another 2 seconds. If the time is not
available from the station, NO UPDAT will appear on the
display instead.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. Once you have
tuned to an RDS broadcast station, it may take a
few minutes for your time to update.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn the knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between time and radio station frequency. Time display
is available with the ignition turned off.
3-41
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FMI
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to
your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations
(six AM, six FMI and six FM2) by performing the
following steps:
TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
4
1. Turn the radio on.
SEEK D : Press the right or the left arrow to seek
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
2. Press AM FM to select AM, FMI or FM2.
To scan stations, press and hold one of the SEEK
arrows for two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio
will go to a station, play for a few seconds and flash
the station frequency, then go on to the next station.
Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return.
To scan preset stations, press and hold one of the
SEEK arrows for more than four seconds until you hear
two beeps. The radio will go to the first preset station
stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds and
flash the station frequency, then go on to the next
preset station. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to
stop scanning presets.
The radio will seek and scan only to stations that are in
the selected band and only to those with a strong
signal.
3-42
3. Tune in the desired station.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bassnreble)
AUDIO: To adjust the bass and the treble, press and
release the AUDIO button repeatedly until BAS or
TRE appears on the display. Then press and ho!d the
up or the down arrow to increase or to decrease. If
a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease
the treble.
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select
BAS or TRE. Then press and hold the AUDIO button for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep. B and
a zero or T and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, first end out of audio mode
either by pressing another button, causing the radio to
perform that function, or by waiting five seconds for
the display to return to time of day. Then press and hold
the AUDIO button for more than two seconds until
you hear a beep. CEN will appear on the display.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, press and release the AUDIO
button until BAL appears on the display. Then press and
hold the up or the down arrow to move the sound
toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release the AUDIO button until
FAD appears onthe display. Then press and hold the up
or the down arrow to move the sound toward the front
or the rear speakers.
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, select
BAL or FAD. Then press and hold AUDIO for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. L and a zero
or F and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, first end out of audio mode
either by pressing another button, causing the radio to
perform that function, or by waiting five seconds for
the display to return to time of day. Then press and hold
AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a
beep. CEN will appear on the display.
Radio Messages
CAL (Calibration): Your audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL
appears on the display it means that your radio has not
been configured properly for your vehicle and must
be returned to the dealership for service.
LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the
[email protected] system has locked up. You must return
to the dealership for service.
3-43
Radio with CD (Base Level)
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FMI
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
a SEEK D : Press the right or the left arrow
to tune
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold one of the SEEK
arrows for two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio
will go to a station, play for a few seconds and flash
the station frequency, then go on to the next station.
Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning.
VOL (Volume): Turn the knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
To scan preset stations, press and hold one of the
SEEK arrows for more than four seconds until you hear
two beeps. The radio will go to the first preset station
stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds and
flash the station frequency, then go on to the next
preset station. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to
stop scanning presets.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between time and radio station frequency. Time display
is available with the ignition turned off.
The radio will seek and scan only to stations that are in
the selected band and only to those with a strong
signal.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system or1
and off.
3-44
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bassnreble)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to
your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations
(six AM, six FM1 and six FbA.2) by performing the
following steps:
AUDIO: To adjust the bass or the treble, press and
release the AUDIO button repeatedly until BAS or TRE
appears on the display. Then press and hold the up
or the down arrow to increase or to decrease. If a station
is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the
treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select AM,
FM1 or FM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select
BAS or TRE. Then press and hold the AUDIO button for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep. B and
a zero or T and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, first end out of audio mode
by pressing another button, causing the radio to perform
that function, or by waiting five seconds for the display
to return to time of day. Then press and hold the AUDIO
button for more than two seconds until you hear a
beep. CEN will appear on the display.
3-45
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Radio Messages
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, press and release the AUDIO
button until BAL appears on the display. Then press and
hold the up or the down arrow to move the sound
toward the right or the left speakers.
CAL (Calibration): Your audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL
appears on the display it means that your radio has not
been configured properly for your vehicle and must
be returned to the dealership for service.
To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,
press and release the AUDIO button until FAD
appears on the display. Then press and hold the up or
the down arrow to move the sound toward the front
or the rear speakers.
LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the
[email protected] system has locked up. You must return
to the dealership for service.
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, select
BAL or FAD. Then press and hold AUDIO for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. L and a zero
or F and a zero will appear on the display.
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. The disc should begin playing. The
display will show CD. If you want to insert a compact
disc with the ignition off, first press RCL or the eject
button.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, first end out of audio mode
by pressing another button, causing the radio to perform
that function, or by waiting five seconds for the display
to return to time of day. Then press and hold AUDIO for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep. CEN
will appear on the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Messages’’ later in this section.
3-46
Playing a Compact Disc
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous track if the current track has been playing
for less than eight seconds. If pressed when the current
track has been playing for more than eight seconds,
it will go to the beginning of the current track. The track
number will appear on the display. If you hold the
pushbutton or press it more than once, the player will
continue moving back through the disc.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
The track number will appear on the display. If you
hold the pushbutton or press it more than once,
the player will continue moving forward through the disc.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Release it to play
the passage. The display will show elapsed time while
reversing.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Release it to play
the passage. The display will show elapsed time while
forwarding.
5 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RND will
appear on the display. Press RDM again to turn off
random play. OFF will appear on the display.
6 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton once to hear a
track over again. RPT will appear on the display.
The current track will continue to repeat. Press RPT
again to turn off repeated play. OFF will appear on the
display.
-d SEEK D : Press the right or the
left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous track. The track number
will appear on the display.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to see the current track
number or how long the current track has been
playing.
AM FM: Press this button to play the radio when a disc
is in the player. The disc will stop but remain in the
player.
CD: With a compact disc in the player and the radio
playing, press this button to play the compact disc. CD
will appear on the display.
/1 (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
3-47
Compact Disc Messages
Radio with Cassette and CD
If the disc comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
You’re driving on a very rough road. When the road
becomes smoother, the disc should play.
It’s very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the disc should play.
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
3-48
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, your audio system adjusts automatically
to make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM or HIGH. AVOL will appear on
the display. Each higher setting will allow for more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then as
you drive, automatic volume increases the volume as
necessary to overcome noise at any speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you
drive. NONE will appear on the display if the radio
cannot determine the vehicle speed. If you don’t want to
use automatic volume, select OFF.
DlSP (Display): Push this knob to switch the display
between radio station frequency and time. Time display
is available with the ignition turned off.
For RDS, push this knob to change what appears on
the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY and the
name of the program (if available).
To change the default on the display, push this knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the knob
for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep
and selected display will now be the default.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FMI,
FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
4
SEEK b’ : Press the right or the left arrow to seek
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
4
SCAN b : Press and hold one of the arrows for
more than two seconds. The radio will produce one beep.
The radio will scan to a station, play for a few seconds,
then go on to the next station. SCAN will be displayed.
Press one of the arrows again to stop scanning.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the selected
band and only to those with a strong signal.
To scan weset stations, press and holdone of the arrows
for more than four seconds. The radio will produce
two beeps. The radio will scan to the first preset station,
play for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. PSCN will be displayed. Press one of the arrows
again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning.
The radio will scan only to preset stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-49
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (BassTTreble)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to
your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations
(six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the
following steps:
AUDIO: Press and release the AUDIO knob until
BASS, MID, or TREB appears on the display. Turn the
knob to increase or to decrease. The display will
show the bass, midrange, or treble level. If a station is
weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FMl or FM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to choose the bass and treble
equalization that best suits the type of station
you are listening to.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons. The radio will produce one beep.
Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton, the
station you set will return and the bass and treble
equalization that you selected will also be
automatically selected for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble to the middle
position, push the AUDIO knob. The radio will
produce one beep and adjust the display level to the
middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and display CENTERED.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to choose bass and treble equalization settings
designed for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock and
classical stations.
To return the bass and treble to the custom mode,
press and release the AUDIO knob, until CUSTOM
appears.
3-50
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Using RDS
AUDIO: To adjust the balance to the right and the
left speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until
BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the right or the left speakers.
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
To adjust the fade to the front and the rear speakers,
push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears
on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound
toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and display CENTERED.
Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming,
receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies,
display messages from radio stations, and
seek to stations with traffic announcements.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming and the name of the program being
broadcast.
3-5 1
Finding a PTY Station
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob. TYPE and a PTY
will appear on the display.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE
LIST knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press the
SEEK TYPE button or one of the SEEK arrows to
take you to the category’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that
category and the category is displayed, press
the SEEK TYPE button once. If the category is not
displayed, press the SEEK TYPE button twice
to display the category and then to go to another
station.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
SCAN: You can also scan through the channels within
a category by performing the following:
1. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob. TYPE and a PTY will
appear on the display.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE
LIST knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either
SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin scanning
within your chosen category.
3-52
4. Press wither SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with
the same program type. Press and hold BAND
for two seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON
will appear on the display. The radio may switch to
stronger stations. Press and hold BAND again for
two seconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF
will appear on the display. The radio will not switch to
other stations.
Setting Preset PTYs
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite PTYs. These buttons have factory PTY presets.
You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FMI and six FM2) by
performing the following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob. TYPE and a PTY will
appear on the display.
3. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you
set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
When a message is not available from a station, NO
INFO will be displayed.
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radic station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a cassette tape or compact disc is playing. If the
cassette tape or compact disc player is playing, play will
stop during the announcement. You will not be able
to turn off alert announcements.
TRAF (Traffic): Press this button to receive traffic
announcements. If the current tuned station does not
broadcast traffic anr,ouncernents, the radio will seek to a
station that does. When the radio finds a station that
broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop. TRAF will
appear on the display and when a traffic announcement
comes on you will hear it. If no station is found, NO
TRAF will appear on the display.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
When a traffic announcement comes on the current
station or on a related network station, you will hear it,
even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is
playing. The traffic symbol and TRAF will appear on the
display while the announcement plays. If the compact
disc player was being used, play will stop during
the announcement.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message. The
message may display the artist and song title, call in
phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it will
appear every three seconds. To scroll through the
message at your own speed, press the INFO button
repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on
the display with each press. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The old message can be displayed
by pressing the INFO button until a new message is
received or a different station is tuned to.
Traffic Interrupt Feature: Your radio can interrupt the
play of a cassette, or CD. Press the TRAF button.
The radio will seek to a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements. When the radio finds a station
that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop.
TRAF will appear on the display. When a traffic
announcement comes on the station that was found,
you will hear it. When the traffic announcement is over,
the radio will resume play of the cassette, or CD.If
no station is found, NO TRAF will appear on the display.
3-53
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): This message is
displayed when the radio has not been calibrated
properly for the vehicle. You must return to the
dealership for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
[email protected] system has locked up. You must return
to the dealership for service.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player. The longer side with the tape visible should
face to the right. If the ignition is on, but the radio is
off, the tape can be inserted and will begin playing. A
tape symbol is shown on the display whenever a tape is
inserted. If you hear nothing but a garbled sound, the
tape may not be in squarely. Press the eject symbol to
remove the tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO and
SEEK controls just as you do for the radio. The display
will show TAPE and an arrow showing which side of
the tape is playing.
If you want to insert a tape while the ignition is off, first
press the eject symbol or DISP.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
3-54
1 PREV (Previous): Your tape must have at least
three seconds of silence between each selection
for previous to work. Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous selection on the tape if the current selection
has been playing for less than three seconds. If pressed
when the current selection has been playing from 3 to
13 seconds, it will go to the beginning of the previous
selection or the beginning of the current selection,
depending upon the position on the tape. If pressed
when the current selection has been playing for
more than 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning of the
current selection.
SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display
while the cassette player is in the previous mode.
Pressing this pushbutton multiple times will increase the
number of selections to be searched back, up to -9.
2 NEXT: Your tape must have at least three seconds of
silence between each selection for next to work.
Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on the
tape. If you press the pushbutton more than once,
the player will continue moving forward through the tape.
SEEK and a positive number will appear on the
display.
3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse the
tape rapidly. Press it again to return to playing speed.
The radio will play while the tape reverses. The
station frequency and REV will appear on the display.
You may select stations during reverse operation
by using the TUNE and SEEK.
4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to advance
quickly to another part of the tape. Press this pushbutton
again to return to playing speed. The radio will play
while the tape advances. The station frequency
and FWD will appear on the display. You may select
stations during forward operation by using TUNE
and SEEK.
5 SIDE: Press this pushbutton
the tape.
to play the other side of
4
SEEK b : The right arrow is the same as the
NEXT pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as the
PREV pushbutton. If the arrow is held or pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving forward
or backward through the tape. SEEK and a positive
or negative number will appear on the display.
4
SCAN b : To scan the tape, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of each selection on
the current side of the tape. Press either SCAN arrow
again, to stop scanning. Your tape must have at
least three seconds of silence between each selection
for scan to work.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
tape is playing. The tape will stop but remain in the
player.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a tape when
listening to the radio. Press this button to switch
between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded.
The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the
radio for future listening.
(Eject): Press this button to stop a tape when it is
playing or to eject a tape when it is not playing. Eject
may be activated with the radio off. Cassette tapes
may be loaded with the radio off if this button is
pressed first.
Cassette Tape Messages
CHK TAPE (Check Tape): I f CHK TAPE appears on
the radio display, the tape won’t play because of one of
the following errors.
e
The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the tape
hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the
open end down and try to turn the right hub
counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over
and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your
tape may be damaged and should not be used in
the player. Try a new tape to make sure your player
is working properly.
The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt
to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
3-55
CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See Care
of Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3-72.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit
with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass
feature on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, perform the following
steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for five
seconds. The radio will display READY and the
tape symbol on the display will flash, indicating the
feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette tape slot. It will
power up the radio and begin playing.
The override feature will remain active until the eject
symbol is pressed.
3-56
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing.
The display will show the CD symbol. If you want
to insert a compact disc with ’the ignition off, first press
DlSP or the eject symbol.
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Messages” later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous track if the current track has been playing ,
for less than eight seconds. If pressed when the current
track has been playing for more than eight seconds,
it will go to the beginning of the current track. TRACK
and the track number will appear on the display. If
you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once, the
player will continue moving back through the disc.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the disc.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to reverse a? I ? times
the normal playing speed. Release it to play the
passage. The display will show ET and the
elapsed time.
4 FWD (Forward): Press
and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance
at six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold
it for more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.
The display will show ET and the elapsed time.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM
ON will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts to play. Press this pushbutton again to turn off
random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
4
SEEK b : Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current or to the previous track. Press the right
arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either arrow
is held or pressed more then once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
4
SCAN b : To scan the disc, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of the disc.
Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
DlSP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time
will appear on the display. To change the default on
the display (track or elapsed time), push the knob until
you see the display you want, then hold the knob
for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep and
selected display will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The CD will stop but remain in the player.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a tape when
listening to the radio. Press this button to switch
between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded.
The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the
radio for future listening.
/1 (Eject):
Press this button to stop a CD when it is
playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
3-57
Compact Disc Messages
If the disc comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
0
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
0
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
You’re driving on a very rough road. When the road
becomes smoother the disc should play.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
It’s very hot. When the temperature returns to
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
normal, the disc should play.
3-58
Radio with Six-Disc CD
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MIN, MED or MAX. Each higher setting will
allow for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds. Then, as you drive, automatic volume increases
the volume, as necessary. to overcome noise at any
speed. The volume level should always sound the same
to you as you drive. If you don’t want to use automatic
volume, select OFF.
RCL (Recall): Push this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Pushing this knob with the ignition off will display
the time.
Playing the Radio
To change the default on the display, push this knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the knob
until the display flashes. The selected display will
now be the default.
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
Finding a Station
VOLUME: Turn the knob to increase or to decrease
volume.
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FMI,
FM2. The display will show your selection.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): Your system has a
feature called automatic volume. With this feature,
your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for
road and wind noise as you drive.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
k SEEK >I : Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-59
k SCAN >I : Press and hold either SCAN arrow for
two seconds until SC appears on the display and
you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for
a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds. PRESET SCAN will
appear on the display. You will hear a double beep.
The radio will go to a preset station stored on your
pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow again
to stop scanning presets.
you set will return and the equalization that you
selected will also be automatically selected for that
pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bassmreble)
AUDIO: Press and release the AUDIO knob until
BASS, MID, or TREB appears on the display. Turn the
knob to increase or to decrease. The display will
show the bass, midrange, or treble level. If a station is
weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Setting Preset Stations
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble to the middle
position, push the AUDIO knob. The radio will
produce one beep and adjust the display level to the
middle position.
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to
your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations
(six AM, six FMI and six FM2), by performing the
following steps:
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and display CENTERED.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FMI or FM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to choose bass and treble equalization settings
designed for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock and
classical stations.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
To return the bass and treble to the custom mode,
press and release the AUDIO knob, until CUSTOM
appears.
3-60
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Using RDS
AUDIO: To adjust the balance to the right and the
left speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until
BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the right or the left speakers.
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
0
To adjust the fade to the front and the rear speakers,
push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears
on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound
toward the front or the rear speakers.
receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies,
0
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and display CENTERED.
Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming,
display messages from radio stations, and
seek to stations with traffic announcements.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming and the name of the program being
broadcast.
3-61
Finding a PTY Station
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button. P-TYPE and the last
selected PTY will be displayed on the screen.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select the category and take you to
the category’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that
category and the category is displayed, press
either SEEK arrow once. If the category is
not
displayed, press either SEEK arrow twice to display
the category and then to go to another station.
5. If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go
back to Step 1.
If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will search
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold the
P-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY
you want to interrupt with. When selected, an asterick
will appear beside that PTY on the display. You
may select multiple interrupts if desired. When you are
listening to a compact disc, the last selected RDS
station will interrupt play if that selected program type
format is broadcast.
3-62
SCAN: You can also scan through the stations within a
category by performing the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button. P-TYPE and the last
selected PTY will be displayed on the screen.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press and
hold either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning within your chosen category.
4. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop at
particular station.
a
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with
the same program type. Press and hold BAND
for two seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON
will appear on the display. The radio may switch to
stronger stations. Press and hold BAND again for
two seconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF
will appear on the display. The radio will not switch
to
other stations. When you turn the ignition off and then on
again, the alternate frequency feature will automatically
be turned on.
Setting Preset PTYs
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite PTYs. These buttons have factory PTY presets.
Yzlu caii set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2) by
performing the following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the P-TYPE button. P-TYPE and the last
selected PTY will be displayed on the screen.
3. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you
set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a compact disc is playing. If the compact disc player
is playing, play will stop during the announcement.
You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message!. The message may display
the artist and song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it
will appear every three seconds. To scroll through the
message at your own speed, press the INFO button
repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on
the display with each press. Qnce the complete
message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The old message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button until a new message is received or a
different station is tuned to.
TRAF (Traffic): TRAF will appear on the display if the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements. To
receive the traffic announcement from the tuned station,
press this button. Brackets will be displayed around
TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes on the
tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press this button and the radio
will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a
station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will
stop. Brackets will be displayed around TRAF and when
a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio
station you will hear it. If no station is found, NO
TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
3-63
Traffic Interrupt Feature: Your radio can interrupt the
play of a CD. Press the TRAF button. The radio will
seek to a station that broadcasts traffic announcements.
When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements, it will stop. Brackets around TRAF will
appear on the display. When a traffic announcement
comes on the station that was found, you will hear
it. When the traffic announcement is over, the radio will
resume play of the CD. If no station is found, NO
TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
Playing a Compact Disc
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Messages” later in this section.
LOAD CD A : Press the LOAD side of this button to
load CDs into the compact disc player. This compact
disc player will hold up to six discs.
To insert one disc, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD side of the LOAD CD
button.
3. Wait for the light, located to the right of the slot, to
turn green.
4. Load a disc. Insert the disc partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the disc in.
3-64
When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be
displayed. If you select an equalization setting for your
disc, it will be activated each time you play a disc.
If the radio is on or off, the disc will begin to play
automatically.
To insert multiple discs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD side of the LOAD CD
button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the light, located to the
right of the slot, will begin to flash and LOAD
ALL will appear on the display.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, load
a disc. Insert the disc partway into the slot, label
side up. The player will pull the disc in.
Once the disc is loaded, the light will begin flashing
again. Once the light stops flashing and turns
green you can load another disc. The disc player
takes up to six discs. Do not try to load more
than six.
To load more than one disc but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When you have finished loading
discs, with the radio on or off, press the LOAD side of
the LOAD CD button to cancel the loading function.
The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be
displayed. If more than one disc has been loaded, a
number for each disc will be displayed. If you select an
equalization setting for your disc, it will be activated
each time you play a disc.
If the radio is on or off, the last disc loaded will begin to
play automatically.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
Playing a Specific Loaded
Compact Disc
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the radio
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX
button to start playing a CD. Then press the numbered
pushbutton that corresponds to the CD you want to
play. A small bar will appear under the CD number that
is playing, and the track number will appear.
If an error appears on the radio display, see “Compact
Disc Messages” later in this section.
LOAD CD A (Eject): Pressing the CD eject side of
this button will eject a single disc or multiple discs.
To eject the disc that is currently playing, press
and release this button. To eject multiple discs, press
and ho!d this button for two seconds. You will hear
a beep and the light will flash to let you know when a
disc is being ejected.
REMOVE CD will be displayed. You can now remove
the disc. If the disc is not removed, after 25 seconds, the
disc will be automatically pulled back into the receiver.
If you try to push the disc back into the receiver,
before the 25 second time period is complete, the
receiver will sense an error and will try to eject the disc
several times before stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject side of the
LOAD CD eject button to eject a disc after you have
tried to push it in manually. The receivers 25-second
eject timer will reset at each press of eject, which
will cause the receiver to not eject the disc until the
25-second time period has elapsed.
Once the player stops and the disc is ejected, remove
the disc. After removing the disc, press the PWR
knob off and then on again. This will clear the
disc-sensing feature and enable discs to be loaded into
the player again.
3-65
<< REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release it to play the passage.
The display will show elapsed time.
>>
FWD
(Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. The
display will show elapsed time.
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, you can repeat one track
or an entire disc. To use repeat, do the following:
0
To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the
display. Press RPT again to turn it off.
To repeat the disc you are listening to, press and
hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will
appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn it off.
3-66
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on
one disc or on all of the discs. To use random, do one of
the following:
0
To play the tracks on the disc you are listening to in
random order, press and hold RDM for more than
two seconds. You will hear a beep and RANDOM
ONE will appear on the display. Press RDM again to
turn it off.
To play the tracks on all of the discs that are
loaded in random order, press and release the RDM
button. RANDOM ALL will appear on the display.
Press RDM again to turn it off.
k SEEK >I : Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have passed.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If you
press the button more than once, the player will continue
moving backward or forward through the disc.
k SCAN >I : To scan one disc, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of the
currently selected disc. SCAN will appear cn the display.
Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded discs, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until DISC SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first tracks of each
disc loaded. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop
scanning.
RCL (Recall): Push this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. To change the default
on the display (track or elapsed time), push the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to play the radio when a
disc(s) is in the player.
Using Song List Mode
The integrated six-disc CD changer has a feature called
song list. This feature is capable of saving 20 track
selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the disc player on and load it with at least
one disc. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this
section for more information.
2. Check to see that the disc changer is not in song
list mode. S-LIST should not appear in the display.
If S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST
button to turn it off.
3. Select the desired disc by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right
arrow button to locate the track that you want
to save. The track will begin to play.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two or
more seconds to save the track into memory.
When SONG LIST is pressed a beep will be heard
immediately. After two seconds of pressing
SONG LIST continuously, two beeps will sound to
confirm that the track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
If you attempt to save more than 20 selections,
S-LIST FULL will appear on the display.
3-67
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the
display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in
the order that they were saved.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks
are moved up the list. When another track is added to
the song list, the track will be added to the end of
the list.
You may seek through the song list by using the SEEK
SCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will
return you to the first saved track.
To delete the entire song list, perform the following
steps:
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the disc player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired
track to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two
seconds. When pressing SONG LIST, one beep
will be heard immediately. After two seconds
of pressing the SONG LIST button continuously,
two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track has
been deleted.
3-68
1. Turn the disc player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more
than four seconds. A beep will be heard, followed
by two beeps after two seconds and a final beep will
be heard after four seconds. S-LIST EMPTY will
appear on the display indicating that the song
list has been deleted.
If a disc is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that disc, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song
list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from
the display.
Compact Disc Messages
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio
display, it could be due to one of the following reasons:
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and
control any of the music sources: radio, cassette
tapes and CDs. However, the rear seat passengers can
only control the music sources that the front seat
passengers are not listening to. For example, rear seat
passengers may listen to a cassette tape or CD
through headphones, while the driver listens to the radio
through the front speakers. The rear seat passengers
have control of the volume for each set of headphones.
Be aware that the front seat audio controls always
have priority over the RSA controls. If the front seat
passengers switch the source for the main radio
to a remote source, the RSA will play the same remote
source.
You’re driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the disc should play.
0
0
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
Primary Radio Controls
The following function is controlled by the knob on the
main radio:
PWR (Power): Push this knob twice to turn RSA off.
3-69
Rear Seat Radio Controls
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FMI
and FM2. If the front passengers are already listening
to the radio, the RSA controller will not switch between
the bands and cannot change the frequency. Press
this button to play a cassette tape or a compact
disc when listening to the radio. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
A
v
SEEK
: While listening to the radio, press the up
or the down arrow to tune to the next or the previous
station and stay there. The sound will mute while
seeking. The SEEK button is inactive if the front radio is
in use.
The following functions are controlled by the RSA
system buttons:
PWR (Power): Press this button to turn RSA on or off.
The rear speakers will be muted when the RSA
power is turned on. You may operate the RSA functions
even when the main radio is off.
VOL (Volume): Press this knob lightly so it extends.
Turn the knob to increase or to decrease volume. Push
the knob back into its stored position when you’re
not using it. The upper VOL knob controls the upper
headphone and the lower VOL knob controls the lower
headphone.
3-70
While listening to a cassette tape, press the up or the
down arrow to hear the next or the previous selection.
The SEEK button is inactive if the tape mode on
the front radio is in use.
While listening to a CD, press the up arrow to hear the
next track on the CD. Press the down arrow to go
back to the start of the current track (if more than
eight seconds have played). The SEEK button is inactive
if the CD mode on the front radio is in use.
To scan stations, press and hold one of the SEEK
arrows until the radio goes into scan mode. The radio
will scan to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on
to the next station. Press SEEK again to stop scanning.
The scan function is inactive if front radio is in use.
PSET PROG (Preset Program): The front passengers
must be listening to something different for each of
these functions to work:
Press this button to scan through the preset radio
stations set on the pushbuttons on the main radio.
The radio will go to a preset station stored on
your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go
on to the next preset station. Press this button
again to stop scanning presets.
When a cassette tape is playing, press this button
to go to the other side of the tape.
e
When a CD is playing, press this button to select
a disc.
TAPE CD: Press this button to switch between playing
a cassette tape or a CD when listening to the radio.
The inactive tape or compact disc will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
(Non-RDS Radios)
[email protected] is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. The feature works automatically by learning a
portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). If the
radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will not operate
and LOC will be displayed.
With [email protected] activated, your radio will not
operate if stolen.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
(RDS Radios)
[email protected] is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. The feature works automatically by learning a
portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). If the
radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will not operate
and LOCKED will be displayed.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that [email protected] is armed.
With [email protected] activated, your radio will not
operate if stolen.
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
FM
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
3-71
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLEAN to
indicate that you have used your tape player for
50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If this
message appears on the display, your cassette
tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes,
but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice
a reduction in sound quality, try a known good
cassette to see if the tape or the tape player is at fault.
If this other cassette has no improvement in sound
quality, clean the tape player.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The
recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealership.
When cleaning the cassette tape player with the
recommended non-abrasive cleaning cassette, it is
possible that the cassette may eject, because the cut
3-72
tape detection feature on your radio may recognize it as
a broken tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning
cassette from being ejected, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for
five seconds. READY will appear on the display
and the cassette symbol will flash for five seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut
tape detection feature is active again.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to
clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will
not eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner
may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type
cleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type
cleaning cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold the eject
button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator.
The radio will display --- or CLEANED to show the
indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Care of Your CDs
Fixed Mast Antenna
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand.
If the mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals,
you should replace it.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Check occasionally to be sure the mast is still tightened
to the fender. If tightening is required, tighten by
hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
Care of Your CD Player
Chime Level Adjustment
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
The radio is the vehicle chime producer. The chime is
produced from the driver’s side front door speakers.
To change the volume level, press and hold
pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the radio power
off. The chime volume level will change from the normal
level to loud, and LOUD will be displayed on the
radio, To change back to the default or normal setting,
press and hold pushbutton 6 again. The chime level
will change from the loud level to normal, and NORMAL
will be displayed. Each time the chime volume is
changed, three chimes will sound to indicate the change.
Removing the radio and not replacing it with a factory
radio or chime module will disable vehicle chimes.
3-73
3-74
Your Driving. the Road. and Your Vehicle .......... 4-2
Defensive Driving ........................................... 4.2
Drunken Driving ............................................. 4-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................ 4-5
Braking ......................................................... 4-5
Locking Rear Axle .......................................... 4-8
Steering ........................................................ 4-9
Off-Road Recovery ....................................... 4-11
Passing ....................................................... 4-11
Loss of Control ............................................. 4-13
Driving at Night ............................................ 4-14
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads .................. 4-15
City Driving ..................................
....4-18
Freeway Driving ........................................... 4.19
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ....................... 4-20
Highway Hypnosis .......................
......... 4-21
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................ 4-22
Winter Driving .............................................. 4-24
I f YouAre Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow ................................................... 4-28
Towing .......................................................... 4-29
Towing Your Vehicle ..................................... 4-29
Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................... 4-29
Loading Your Vehicle .................................... 4-30
Towing a Trailer ........................................... 4-32
4- 1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1- 10.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when
the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn
suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task - such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor - makes proper defensive driving more difficult
4-2
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the
road in a safe place to do them yourself. These simple
defensive driving techniques could save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults - by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population - choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How t-nuch is “io0
much” if someone plans to drive? It’s a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
The amount of alcohol consumed
0
0
0
The drinker’s body weight
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 Ib
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 - 1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 mI of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men.
4-3
Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United
States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “1’11 be careful” isn’t the right
4-4
answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to take
sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord or heart. This means that when anyone who
has been drinking - driver or passenger - is in a
crash, that person’s chance of being killed or
permanently disabled is higher than if the person had
not been drinking.
)rir..--ng an
lriv J very
isdangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness
and judgement can be affected by even a
small amount of alcohol. You can have a
serious - or even fatal - collision if you drive
after drinking. Please don’t drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride
home in a cab; or if you’re with a group,
designate a driver who will not drink.
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering and the accelerator. All three systems have
to do their work at the places where the tires meet
the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving
at 60 mph (I00 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That
could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping
enough space between your vehicle and others is
important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the
tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle.
4-5
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts - heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking - rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
4-6
Anti-lock Brake System
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on. This is normal.
If there’s a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anfi-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-32.
Let’s say the road is wet and you’re driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here’s what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
4-7
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or vou mav notice some noise, but
Locking Rear Axle
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the
vehicle in front of you, you won’t have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
4-8
If your vehicle has-thisfeature, your locking rear axle
can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand
or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the
time, but when one of the rear wheels has no traction
and the other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move the vehicle.
Steering
Power Steering
If yoc lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll
understand this.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems - steering and acceleration - have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you can
control.
4-9
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking - if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action - steering around the
problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-5. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-10
ff-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re
driving.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents - the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement’ recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it’s all
right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
4-1 1
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your area
of vision, especially if you’re following a larger
vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if the
vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep
back a reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move
into the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a “running start” that more than makes
up for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone isn’t
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
4-12
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front
in your inside mirror, activate your right lane
change signal and move back into the right lane.
(Remember that your right outside mirror is convex.
The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.)
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes,
steering and acceleration) don’t have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always
possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to
slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration
or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues - such as enough water, ice or packed snow
on the road to make a “mirrored surface” - and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-1 3
Driving at Night
Here are some tips on night driving.
Drive defensively.
Don’t drink and drive.
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow
down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired - by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
4-14
e
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
e
In remote areas, watch for animals.
e
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may
cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also make
a lot of things invisible.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean - inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness - the inability to see in dim light - and
aren’t even aware of it.
.....
5.
.
.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires don’t have much tread left,
you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go
slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are
driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your
reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-15
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road
and even people walking.
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before you
hit them.
Wet brakes can cause accidents.They won’t
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
4-16
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water crossing,
your vehicle can be carried away. As little as
six inches of flowing water can carry away a
smaller vehicle. If this happens, you and other
vehicle occupants could drown. Don’t ignore
police warning signs, and otherwise be very
cautious about trying to drive through flowing
water.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if
your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and
raindrops “dimple’’ the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
r
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See Tires on page 5-60.
4-17
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You’ll save time and energy.
See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”
Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention
to traffic signals.
4-18
Freeway Driving
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to
move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
4-19
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
e
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are
going slower than you actually are.
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservior full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
e
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
e
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
e
Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
e
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
e
Weafher Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
e
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh - such as after a day’s
work - don’t plan to make too many miles that first
part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes
you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts
in dealerships all across North America. They’ll be
ready and willing to help if you need it.
4-20
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as “highway
hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?
Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or
whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t
let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave
the road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
Then here are some tips:
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
4-21
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
0
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
9
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-22
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would
then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let
your engine assist your brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
0
Coastingdovw,.n~illin NEUTRALorwiththe
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transmission, and you can climb the hill
better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or
cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4-23
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth and reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be
driving under severe conditions, include a small bag
of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
4-24
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to
be very careful.
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s
about freezing (32°F; OOC) and freezing rain begins
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
crews can get there.
Whatever the condition - smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow - drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If
you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Even though you have an anti-lock braking system,
you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry pavement. See Braking on page 4-5.
0
0
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer
Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass
may remain icy when the surrounding roads
are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,
brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.
4-25
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
I’/.
’
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
,
’
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
Turn on your hazard flashers.
4-26
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats - anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside.CO could
overcome you and kill you. You can’tsee it or
smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any thatis
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery (or batteries) charged. You will
need a well-charged battery (or batteries) to restart the
vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with your
headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
4-27
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your
wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can
help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must
use caution.
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transmission or other parts of
the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you’re stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Don’t spin the wheels above 35 mph
(55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
4-28
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-68.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release
the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly
on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is
in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward
and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking
motion that may free your vehicle. If that doesn’t get
you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out.
If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your
Vehicle” following.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-5.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome)
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle - such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device known as
a “dolly”).
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with any of
its wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be
towed, see “Towing Your Vehicle” earlier in this section.
4-29
Loading Your Vehicle
The Certificationrrire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
The Certificationflire label is found on the rear edge of
the driver’s door. The label shows the size of your
original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is
called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The
GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel and cargo.
4-30
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Payload
-I
,,,rigs you put inside yourve,,,cle can strike
and injure people ina sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
0 Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
0 Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicleso that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
0 Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
0
0
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you
The Payload Capacity is shown on the Certificationrrire
label. This is the maximum load capacity that your
vehicle can carry. Be sure to include the weight of the
people inside as part of your load. If you added any
accessories or equipment after your vehicle left
the factory, remember to subtract the weight of these
things from the payload. Your dealer can help you
with this.
Add-on Equipment
When you carry removable items, you may need to put
a limit on how many people you carry inside your
vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy
and install the new equipment.
4-31
-
Towing a Trailer
If you don’t use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well -- or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask your
dealer for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your dealer for
important information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle. Additional rear axle maintenance
is required for a vehicle used to towa trailer. See
“Scheduled Maintenance Services’’ in the Index.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle,
you should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer”
that appears later in this section.
If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,
it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and
it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
4-32
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
the weight of the trailer,
If you do, here are some important points:
0
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
Consider using a sway control if your trailer will
weigh 4,000 Ibs (1 800 kg) or less. You should
always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh
more than 4,000 Ibs (1 800 kg). You can ask a
hitch dealer about sway controls.
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
0
0
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
the weight of the trailer tongue
0
and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Tow/HauI Mode
Tow/haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load. The purpose of the
tow/haul mode is to:
0
Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability
of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or
a large or heavy load.
0
Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when
the vehicle is unloaded.
0
Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring
less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift
the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a
lower gear selection if the transmission shifts
too often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions).
4-33
Your vehicle is equipped
with a button on the
instrument panel, to the
right of the steering wheel,
which when pressed
enables tow/haul.
Tow/haul is designed to be most effective when the
vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75% of
the vehicle’s Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR).
Tow/haul is most useful under the following driving
conditions:
When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load through rolling terrain.
When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load in stop and go traffic.
TOW / HAUL
When the button is
pressed, this light on the
instrument panel will
illuminate to indicate that
tow/haul has been
selected.
Tow/haul may be turned off by pressing the button
again, at which time the indicator light on the instrument
panel will turn off. The vehicle will automatically turn
off tow/haul every time it is started.
4-34
When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load in busy parking lots where improved low
speed control of the vehicle is desired.
Operating the vehicle in tow/haul when lightly loaded or
with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,
there is no benefit to the selection of tow/haul when the
vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded
may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving
characteristics and reduced fuel economy. Tow/haul
is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a
large or heavy load.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how
much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any special equipment that
you have on your vehicle.
The following chart shows how much your trailer can weigh, based upon vehicle model and options.
I
I
I
Vehicle*
GI500 Cargo Van 2WD*
4300 V6
I Axle Ratio I
I
I
3.42
I
I
Maximum Trailer Weight
4,400
Ibs.
(1 998 kg)
I
GCWR
I
9,000 Ibs. (4 086 kg)
I
12,000 Ibs. (5 448 kg)
6,400 Ibs. (2 906 kg)
3.42
3.73
*Trailer tongue weight should be 10 percent to 15 percent of trailer weight up to 1,000 Ibs (454 kg).
5300 V8
I
I
I
~
1
4-35
-
I
I
I
I
1
1
I
I
Maximum Trailer GCWR
Weight
I
I
4,000 Ibs. (1 816 kg)
Vehicle*
Axle Ratio
GI500 Passenger Van 2WD*
4300 V6
3.42
I
I
I
9,000 Ibs. (4 086 kg)
12,000 Ibs. (5 448 kg)
6,400 Ibs. (2 906 kg)
3.73
3.42
* Tongue weight should be 10 percent to 15 percent of trailer weight up to 1,500 Ibs (680kg).
5300 V8
I
Vehicle*
I Axle Ratio
HI500 Passenger Van AWD*
I
I
I
I
I
Maximum Trailer
GCWR
Weiqht
~~
12,000 Ibs. (5 448 kg)
6,200 Ibs. (2 815 kg)
3.73
3-42
* Tongue weight should be 10 percent to 15 percent of trailer weight up to 1,000 Ibs (454 kg).
5300 V8
4-36
I
I
I
~~
1
I
4800 V8
6000 V8
Vehicle*
I Axle Ratio 1
Maximum TrailerGCWR
Weight
1
F o n g u e weight should be 10 percent to 15 percent of trailer weight up to 1,000 Ibs (454 kg).
4-37
I
I
I
I
I
I
Vehicle*
Ratio
Axle
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR
G2500 Passenger Van 2WD Long Wheelbase*
14,000 Ibs. (6 356 kg)
3.73
7,600 Ibs. (3 450 kg)
6000 V8
16,000 Ibs. (7 264 kg)
4.10
9,600 Ibs. (4 358 kg)
* Tongue weight should be 10 percent to 15 percent of trailer weight up to 1,000 Ibs (454 kg).
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR
Vehicle*
G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Short Wheelbase*
14,000 Ibs. (6 356 kg)
8,300 Ibs. (3 768 kg)
3.73
6000 V8
16,000 Ibs. (7 264 kg)
4.10
10,000 Ibs. (4 540 kg)
* Tongue weight should be 10 percent to 15 percent of trailer weight up to 1,500 Ibs (680 kg).
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR
Vehicle*
G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase*
14,000 Ibs. (6 356 kg)
3.73
8,100 Ibs. (3 677 kg)
6000 V8
16,000 Ibs. (7 264 kg)
4.1 0
10,000 Ibs. (4 540 kg)
* Tongue weight should be 10 percent to 15 percent of trailer weight up to 1,500 Ibs (680 kg).
4-38
6000 V8
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the
driver is in the towing vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the towing vehicle
must be subtracted from the above maximum trailer
weights.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in
your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L I H 8P7
4-39
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add
the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be
carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-30 about your vehicle’s maximum load
capacity.
If you’re using a weight-carrying or a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights
are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them
right simply by moving some items around in the
trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30. Then be
sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer tongue.
A
4-40
B
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
0
The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the
bumper. Do not use a ball hitch, because it could
pull the bumper loose.
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 4,000 Ibs (1 800 kg), be sure to
use a properly mounted, weight-distributing
hitch and sway control of the proper size. This
equipment is very important for proper vehicle
loading and good handling when you’re driving.
e
Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you’re using the wiring provided by the
factory-installed hitch, you should not need to make any
holes in the body of your vehicle. However, if you
have an aftermarket hitch installed, you may need to
make holes in the body.
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when you
remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into
your vehicle. Dirt and water can, too.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be
provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer
manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your rig. Never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
4-41
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 Ibs (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes - and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install,
adjust and maintain them properly.
Your trailer brake system can tap into your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system, except:
Don’t tap into your vehicle’s brake system if the
trailer’s brake system will use more than 0.02 cubic
inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s master
cylinder. If it does, both braking systems won’t work
well. You could even lose your brakes.
Will the trailer parts take 3,000 psi (20 650 kPa) of
pressure? If not, the trailer brake system must not
be used with your vehicle.
If everything checks out this far, then make the
brake fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that
sends fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use
copper tubing for this. If you do, it will bend and
finally break off. Use double-walled steel tubing.
4-42
Driving with a Trailer
If you have a rear-most window open and you
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle.
You can’t see or smell CQ. It can cause
unconsciousness or death. See “Engine
Exhaust” in the Index. To maximize your safety
when towing a trailer:
Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
Keep the rear-most windows closed.
If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
the climate control setting for maximum air
because it only recirculates the air inside
your vehicle. See “Climate Controls” in
the Index.
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return lo your lane.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Backing Up
Making Turns
Notices Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
4-43
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Driving On Grades
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra
wiring and a heavy-duty turn signal flasher (included
in the optional trailering package).
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
4-44
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a
few minutes before turning the engine off. If you do get
the overheat warning, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-28.
Parking on Hills
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
’
~1 really
should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
* startyourengine,
shift into a gear, and
release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet. Then turn your wheels into the curb if
facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling system and
brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,
and the Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections
before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-45
Trailer Wiring Harness
The optional heavy-duty trailer wiring package includes
a seven-wire harness assembly at the rear of the
vehicle and a four-wire harness assembly under the left
hand side of the instrument panel. The seven-wire
harness assembly is taped together and located in a
frame pocket at the driver side rear left corner of
the frame. The seven-wire harness includes a 30-amp
feed wire. Both harnesses come without connectors and
should be wired by a qualified electrical technician.
The technician can use the following color code chart
when connecting the wiring harness to your trailer
and trailer brake controller.
Seven-Wire Harness
Light Green: Back-up lamps
Brown: Parking lamps
Yellow: Left stoplamp and turn signal
Dark Green: Right stoplamp and turn signal
Dark Blue: Use for electric
trailer brakes
Orange: Trailer accessory
White (heavy gage): Ground wire
Four-Wire Harness (Trailer Brake Controller)
Black: Ground
Redwhite Stripe: FusedBattery
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Feed
Light Blue: Fused Stop/CHMSL
4-46
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ...............................................
......5.3
Doing Your Own Service Work ...................... 5.4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle .................................
......5-4
Fuel ................................................................ 5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................ 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................... 5-5
California Fuel ............................................... 5-6
Additives ....................................................... 5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ............................... 5-6
Filling Your Tank ............................................ 5-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ....................... 5-9
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
..............................
....5-10
Hood
Release
Engine Compartment Overview ....................... 5-12
Engine Oil ................................................... 5-14
Engine Air CleanedFilter ............................... 5-19
Automatic Transmission Fluid ......................... 5-21
Engine Coolant ............................................. 5-24
Radiator Pressure Cap .............................. 5-27
Engine Overheating ........
........................ 5-28
Cooling System ............................................ 5-30
Engine Fan Noise .........................................
Power Steering Fluid .....................................
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................
Brakes ........................................................
Battery ........................................................
Jump Starting ...............................................
All-Wheel Drive ..............................................
Rear Axle ....................................................
Front Axle ......................................................
Noise Control System .....................................
Tampering with Noise Control System
Prohibited .................................................
Bulb Replacement ..........................................
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................
Headlamps ..................................................
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps ..........................................
Taillamps .....................................................
Replacement Bulbs .......................................
5.37
5.37
5.38
5.40
5.43
5.44
5-49
5.50
5-51
5-52
5.52
5-54
5.54
5-54
5.56
5.56
5-58
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5.59
5- 1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Tires ............................................................. 5.60
Inflation .. Tire Pressure ................................ 5.61
Dual Tire Operation ....................................... 5.62
Tire Inspection and Rotation ........................... 5.62
When It Is Time for New Tires ....................... 5-64
Buying New Tires ......................................... 5-64
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .......................... 5-65
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-66
Wheel Replacement ...................................... 5-67
Tire Chains .................................................. 5-68
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................ 5-68
Changing a Flat Tire ..................................... 5-69
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-85
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................. 5-85
Care of Safety Belts ...................................... 5-88
Weatherstrips ............................................... 5-88
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............5-88
5-2
Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5.91
Finish Damage ............................................. 5.91
Underbody Maintenance ................................ 5.91
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5-92
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ...........5.92
Vehicle Identification ...................................... 5.94
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
Service Parts Identification Label ..
...........5.94
Electrical System ....................................... 5 9 5
Add-on Electrical Equipment ...........
.......5.95
Headlamp Wiring ..................................... 5-95
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................ 5.95
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................ 5.96
Capacities and Specifications ........................ 5.101
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .........5.104
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you'll go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You'll get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you'll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you
much more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-10.
Your vehicle may have an air bag system. If it does,
see Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 1-76 before attempting to do your own
service work.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Part E: Maintenance Record on page 6-21.
I
You can be injured and your vc ... ! c( d be
damaged if you try todo service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
breakorfall
off. You couldbehurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
5-4
Fuel
Gasoline Specifications
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by the American Automobile
Manufacturers Association and endorsed by the
Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better
vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasoline
meeting these specifications could provide improved
driveability and emission control system performance
compared to other gasoline.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may
get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage
your engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerate
or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not
indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is
necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane
fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service.
In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the pump.
Canada Only
5-5
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it
is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on (see Malfunction lndicator Lamp on page 3-33)
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your
warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. You should not have to add anything to your
fuel. Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as
ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be
available in your area to contribute to clean air.
General Motors recommends that you use these
gasolines, particularly if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
Filling Your Tank
1
The fuel cap is located
behind a hinged door on
the driver’s side of
your vehicle.
Fuel L , lor is highly flamm:e.
It b ns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near fuel or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from fuel.
5-7
To remove the fuel cap,
turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). While
refueling, place the
fuel cap in the holder
provided.
I
If you get fuel on yourself and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can
spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too
quickly. This spray can happenif your tank is
nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any
“hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the capall
the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaning the Outside
of Your Vehicle on page 5-88. When filling the tank
do not overfill by squeezing in much more fuel after the
pump shuts off.
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction lndicator Lamp on
page 3-33.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See “Malfunction indicator Lamp” in the
Index.
Fillin! a
A
Irtable
r
~
1 Container
- -
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-9
Checking Things Under
the Hood
Thing hat
burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-10
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull this handle inside
the vehicle. It is located
in front of the driver’s
side door frame
near the floor.
4. Release the hood
prop from its retainer
and put the hood
prop into the slot in the
hood hinge on the
driver's side.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift up the
secondary hood release underneath the middle of
the hood.
3. Lift the hood.
If your vehicle has an underhood lamp, it will
automatically come on and stay on until the hood is
closed.
Before closing the hood, be sure all of the filler caps are
on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on
the hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the
slot in the hood and return the prop to its retainer. then
let the hood down and close it firmly.
5-1 1
Engine Compartment Overview
When you lift the hood, you'll see these items:
5-12
A.
6.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Battery
Radiator Pressure Cap
Coolant Recovery Tank
Transmission Fluid Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Engine Oil Dipstick
G. Air Filter Restriction Indicator
H. Engine Air CleanedFilter
I. Power Steering Reservoir
J. Brake Master Cylinder
K. Windshield Washer Fluid
5-13
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick has
a yellow handle and is
located near the center of
the engine compartment.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for more information
on location.
5-14
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil ‘pan. If you don’t, the oil
dipstick might not show the actual level.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll need
to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use
the right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
and Specifications on page 5- 101.
Notice: Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range,
your engine could be damaged.
The engine oil filler cap is
located between the
coolant recovery tank and
the engine air cleaner/filter.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for more information
on location.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
5-15
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the starburst symbol.
This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use
any oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.
HOT
WEATHER
If you choose to perform
the engine oil change
service yourself, be sure
the oil you use has
the starburst symbol on
the front of the oil
container. If you have your
oil changed for you, be
sure the oil put into
your engine is American
Petroleum Institute certified
for gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the viscosity chart.
5-16
COLD
WEATHER
LOOK
FOR THIS
SYMBOL
I
As in the chart shown previously, SAE 5W-30 is the
only viscosity grade recommended for your vehicle. You
should look for and use only oils which have the API
Starburst symbol and which are also identified as
SA€ 5W-30. If you cannot find such SAE 5W-30 oils,
you can use an SAE 1OW-30 oil which has the API
Starburst symbol, if it's going to be 0°F (-18°C)
or above. Do not use other viscosity grade oils, such as
SAE IOW-40 or SAE 20W-50 under any conditions.
Notice: Use only engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM [email protected] oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below -20°F (-29"C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Don't add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol are all you will need for
good performance and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil
(GM Oil Life System)
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can
vary considerably. For the oil life system to work
properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is
changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A change engine oil light on the instrument
panel will come on. Change your oil as soon as
possible within the next two times you stop for fuel. It is
possible that, if you are driving under the best
conditions, the oil life system may not indicate that an
oil change is necessary for over a year. However,
your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once
a year and at this time they system must be reset. It
is also important to check your oil regularly and keep it
at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-17
How to Reset the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL Light
The GM Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime
your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
change engine oil light being turned on, reset the
system.
To reset the change engine oil light, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal
three times within five seconds.
3. If the change engine oil light flashes for
five seconds, the system is reset.
If the system does not reset, try the procedure once
again. If it still does not reset, see your dealer for
service.
See Change Engine Oil Light on page 3-37.
5-18
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Your vehicle may have this
feature. The engine air
cleaner/filter assembly has
an indicator that lets
you know when the air
filter is dirty and needs to
be serviced.
If the area inside the clear section of the indicator is
green, no air filter service is required. When the
area inside the indicator is orange and CHANGE AIR
FILTER appears, press the button to reset.
The engine air cleaner/filter is located near the center of
the engine compartment. See Engine Comparfment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.
5-19
Check the indicator again after your vehicle has been
driven. If the area inside the indicator is orange and
CHANGE AIR FILTER appears, the filter should
be replaced.
Refer to the maintenance schedule to determine when
to replace the engine air cleaner/filter. See Part A:
Scheduled Maintenance Services on page 6-4.
To replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the following:
1. Unhook the retainer clips and remove the cover.
2. Lift the filter out of the engine air cleaner/filter
housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as
little dirt as possible.
3. Clean the engine air cleanedfilter housing.
4. Install the new engine air cleanedfilter into the
engine air cleaner/filter housing. Make sure that
it fits properly into the housing.
Operating the engine with the air cleanedfilter
off can cause you or others to beburned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops
flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t there
and the engine backfires, you could be burned.
Don’t drive with it off, and be careful working
on the engine with the air cleanedfilteroff.
5. Install the cover and fasten the retaining clips.
6. After the engine air cleanedfilter is properly
serviced, the indicator should be reset. Push
the button on the top of the indicator to reset it to
the green (clean) filter zone.
See Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 5-104 for the proper filter to use.
5-20
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging enginefire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when
you’re driving.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
How to Check
When to Check and Change
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83,000 km) if the vehicle’s GVWR is over 8,600 or if
the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
When doing frequent trailer towing.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
part or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
0
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
If your vehicle’s GVWR is not over 8,600 and you do
not use your vehicle under any of these conditions,
change the fluid and filter every 100,000 miles
(166 000 km).
See Part A:
page 6-4.
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
0
In heavy traffic - especially in hot weather.
0
While pulling a trailer.
Scheduled Maintenance Services on
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at
normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
5-21
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it's colder than 50°F (lO'C), drive the vehicle
in DRIVE (D) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
50°F (10°C) or more. If it's colder than 50°F (lO"C), you
may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot
will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
5-22
With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
r'hen, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The transmission dipstick
is located near the center
of the engine compartment
and will be labeled with
this graphic shown.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5- 12
for more information
on location.
Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and
wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
Using a funnel, add fluid down the transmission dipstick
tube only after checking the transmission fluid while it
is hot. (A cold check is used only as a reference.) If the
fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid
to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one pint
(0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
0
Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area for
a cold check or in the HOT area or cross-hatched
area for a hot check.
If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6- 19.
Notice: We recommend you use only fluid labeled
[email protected] -111, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than [email protected] -111 is
not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
0
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
5-23
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
[email protected] engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add
only [email protected] extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-28.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
[email protected] coolant will:
Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
5-24
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: When adding coolant, it is important that
you use only [email protected] (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than [email protected] is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result.In addition, the engine
coolant will require change sooner
-- at 30,000 miles
(50,000km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first.
Damage caused by the use of coolant other
than [email protected] is not covered by your new
vehicle warranty.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half [email protected] coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture,
I don’t need to add anything else.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and the proper coolant.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you don’t
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
5-25
Adding Coolant
Checking Coolant
F
The coolant recovery tank
is located near the center
of the engine
compartment. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5- 12 for more
information on location.
If you need more coolant, add the proper [email protected]
coolan+rixture at the cool--t recovery tank.
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will
almost never have to add coolantat the
radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure
cap even a little -- when the engine and
radiator are hot.
--
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at COLD
FILL, or a little higher.
5-26
Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful
not to spill it.
Radiator Pressure Cap
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don't spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator.
For information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see Cooling System on page 5-30.
The radiator pressure cap is located near the center of
the engine compartment.
Notice: Your radiator cap is a pressure-type cap
and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss
and possible engine damage from overheating.
5-27
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
Steam from an over ate __ 3nc_ 3 can --rn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index for information on driving
to a safe place in an emergency.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index for
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
5-28
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stopafterhigh-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” in Towing a
Trailer on page 4-32.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues, and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast
as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the
engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-29
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
A. Radiator Pressure Cap
B. Coolant Recovery Tank
C. Engine Cooling Fan(s)
5-30
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down.
When the engine is cold,
the coolant level should be
at or above the COLD
FILL mark. If it isn’t, you
may have a leak at
the pressure cap or in the
radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water
pump or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
Heater - z ~ n
d or hoses, anc - ther engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is aleak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you couldbe
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
See if the engine cooling fan speed increases when idle
speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn off
the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index for information on driving to a
safe place in an emergency.
Notice: When adding coolant, it is important that
you use only [email protected](silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than [email protected] is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result.In addition, the engine
coolant will require change sooner
- at 30,000 miles
(50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first.
Damage caused by the useof coolant other
than [email protected] is not covered by your new
vehicle warranty.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
See if the engine cooling fan speed increases when idle
speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn off
the engine.
5-31
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at the COLD FILL mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and [email protected] engine coolant
at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-24 for more information.
I
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plainwater, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX [email protected] coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
5-32
I
r
I
You c i be IrncIOU spillcoolant on ..Dt
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
~
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
COLD FILL mark, start your vehicle.
They are under pressure, and if you turn the
radiatorpressure cap even a little they can
come out at high speed. Never turn the cap
when the cooling system, including the
radiator pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
cooling system and radiator pressure cap to
cool if you ever have to turn the pressurecap.
--
--
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.
n
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
5-33
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until
it first stops. (Don’t press down while turning the
pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
5-34
3. Fill the radiator with the proper [email protected]
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
neck. See Engine Coolant on page 5-24 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the COLD
FILL mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure cap off.
5-35
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper [email protected] coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.
5-36
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap.
Engine Fan Noise
Power Steering Fluid
Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions, the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is
not fully engaged. This improves fuel economy and
reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer
towing and/or high outside temperatures, the fan
speed increases as the clutch more fully engages.
So you may hear an increase in fan noise. This
is normal and should not be mistaken as the
transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely
the cooling system functioning properly. The fan will
slow down when additional cooling is not required and
the clutch partially disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially
disengages.
The power steering fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
5-37
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-19. Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use
the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses
and seals.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then
remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the
dipstick.
The level should be at the COLD FILL mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to
the mark.
To prevent contamination of brake fluid, never check or
fill the power steering reservoir with the brake master
cylinder cover off.
5-38
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
A
A
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full.
Notice:
When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
e
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water doesn’t
clean as well as washer fluid.
e
Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it’s very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your
washer system and paint.
5-39
Brakes
Brake Fluid
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well,
or won’t work at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top o f f your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3
brake fluid. See Engine Cornparfrnent Overview on
page 5-12 for the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in.
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
5-40
I1 ,JU have too much bra.., fluid, it ,-n +..I
on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Part C: Periodic
Maintenance lnspections on page 6-77.
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake
fluid without taking off
the cap.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
With the vb,,ng
kind of ..,id in yo^. Jra.-system, your brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake
fluid.
Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it isn’t, have your brake system
checked to see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6- 19.
Notice:
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system
parts so badly that they’ll have to be replaced.
Don’t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle.If
you do, wash it off immediately. See
“Appearance Care” in the Index.
5-41
Notices Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving (except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal 4;v-1y).
Thebrake wear warning sound means t, ,t
soon your brakes won’t work well. That could
lead to an accident. When you hear the brake
wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
I
1
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See Brake System Inspection on page 6-18
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
5-42
Replacing Brake System Parts
Vehicle Storage
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system - for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in - be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If
you don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly.
For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are
wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your
front and rear brakes can change - for the worse.
The braking performance you’ve come to expect can
change in many other ways if someone puts in the
wrong replacement brake parts.
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or
more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
Battery
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your
vehicle for longer storage periods.
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
[email protected] battery. When it’s time for a new battery, gel
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an [email protected]
battery. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5- 12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Batter ; have ac
at caind r n you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” next for
tips on working around a battery without
~
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature (Non-RDS Radios) on page 3-71 or
Theft-Deterrent Feature (RDS Radios) on page 3-71.
5-43
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to foI’--i the steps below to do it safely.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
They contain acid that can burn you.
They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.
5-44
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both vehicles can be
damaged.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or in the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that aren’t needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
could save your radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (-) terminal locations of the other vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting
terminal and a remote negative (-) jump starting
terminal. You should always use these remote
terminals instead of the terminals on the battery.
The remote positive (+) terminal is located behind a
red plastic cover near the engine accessory drive
bracket on the driver’s side below the alternator. To
uncover the remote positive (+) terminal, open
the red plastic cover.
The remote negative (-) terminal is located on the
engine drive bracket on all V8 engines and it is
marked “G ND.”
On V6 engines the remote negative (-) terminal is
located on a tab attached to the engine accessory
drive bracket where it is marked “GND.”
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12.
Using a matc.. .\ear a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You
don’t need to add water to the [email protected]
battery installed in your new vehicle. But if a
battery has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water
to take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive
gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
5-45
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
~
_
_
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If !hey do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged, too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (-) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (-) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you will
get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts, too. And don’t connect
the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal
on the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
5-46
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end of the negative (-) cable
doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (-1 terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (-) cable
to the negative (-) terminal of the dead battery or
to a remote negative (-) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
IO. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
8. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal
of the good battery. Use
a remote negative (-)
terminal if the vehicle
has one.
11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it
won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: Damage to your vehicle may result from
electrical shorting if jumper cables are removed
incorrectly. To prevent electrical shorting, take care
that the cables don’t touch each other or any
other metal. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
5-47
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
B\
1. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the positve (+) remote terminal to its original
position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (-) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (-) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-48
All-Wheel Drive
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. However, there are two additional systems that
need lubrication.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections on page 6- 17.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-19.
5-49
Rear Axle
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
When to Check Lubricant
If you have the 1500 Series, the proper level is from
5/8 inch (15 mm) to 1 5/8 inch (40 mm) below the
bottom of the filler plug hole. The proper level for the
2500 and 3500 Series is from 0 to 1/4 (6 mm) below the
bottom of the filler plug hole. Add only enough fluid to
reach the proper level.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services on page 6-4.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-19.
5-50
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on page 6-4.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level to 3/8 inch (10 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-19.
If the level is below the
bottom of the filler plug
hole, you may need to add
some lubricant.
5-51
Noise Control System
Tampering With Noise Control System
Prohibited
Tampering with Noise Control
System Prohibited
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing
thereof:
The following information relates to compliance with
federal noise emission standards for vehicles with
a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of more than
10,000 Ibs (4 536 kg). The Maintenance Schedule
provides information on maintaining the noise control
system to minimize degradation of the noise emission
control system during the life of your vehicle. The noise
control system warranty is given in your warranty
booklet.
These standards apply only to vehicles sold in the
United States.
5-52
1. The removal or rendering inoperative by any
person, other than for purposes of maintenance,
repair or replacement, of any device or element of
design incorporated into any new vehicle for
the purpose of noise control, prior to its sale or
delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in
use; or
2. The use of the vehicle after such device or element
of design has been removed or rendered inoperative
by any person.
Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are
the acts listed below.
Fan and Drive:
Removal of fan clutch (if equipped) or rendering
clutch inoperative.
Insulation:
Removal of the noise shields or any underhood
insulation.
Engine:
Removal or rendering engine speed governor
(if equipped) inoperative so as to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer specifications.
Removal of the fan shroud (if equipped).
Air Intake:
0
Removal of the air cleaner silencer.
Modification of the air cleaner.
Exhaust:
Removal of the muffler and/or resonator.
0
Removal of the exhaust pipes and exhaust pipe
clamps.
5-53
Bulb Replacement
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
For the type of bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 5-58.
Halogen Bulbs
Headlamps
1. Remove the two bolts from the headlamp assembly.
2. Remove the two pins on the top of the headlamp
assembly. To remove the pins, turn the outer pin
clockwise and pull it straight up. To remove
the inner pin, turn it counterclockwise and pull it
straight up.
3. Lift the inboard side of the headlamp to release the
inboard tab from the radiator support.
4. Lift the outboard side of the headlamp to release
the outboard tab from the radiator support.
Halogen bulk,, have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
5-54
5. Lower the headlamp to allow the vertical adjustor to
clear tie bar.
6. Turn the headlamp forward and upward to remove
it from the grille.
7 . Turn the bulb connector counterclockwise and pull it
out of the housing.
8. Without removing the headlamp assembly itself,
remove the bulb socket from the back of the
headlamp on the driver's side.
9. Turn the bulb counterclockwise one quarter turn to
remove it from the socket.
11. Install the new bulb into the socket and return it to
the headlamp assembly.
12. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle
and reinstall the two pins.
10. On the passenger's side, turn the bulb clockwise
one turn. Do not touch the glass part of the bulb.
5-55
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps
Taillamps
1. Use a small tool to unlatch the outboard clip on
this lamp.
2. Pull the lamp forward to completely unlatch the clip.
Move the lamp outboard to loosen the tabs.
3. Remove the lamp from the grille.
4. Squeeze the tab on the side of the bulb assembly
while turning it counterclockwise.
5. Remove the bulb assembly from the back of the
lens and replace the bulb.
6. Turn the socket clockwise to reinstall it in the lens
assembly.
1. Remove the two inboard nuts on the side assembly.
2. Pull side assembly rearward to clear studs.
3. Rotate side assembly on the outboard side,
releasing the upper clip.
4. Slide assembly slightly upward to release lower clip.
5. Reinstall the clips to the side assembly.
6. Remove the three nuts on the taillamp.
7. Remove the taillamp from the vehicle.
5-56
8. To remove, squeeze the tab on the side of the
sockets while turning them counterclockwise.
9. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it. Install
the new bulb.
10. Reverse the above steps to reinstall the lamp.
5-57
Center High Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
Replacement Bulbs
Bulb Number
Exterior Lamp
Sealed Beam Headlamps
H6054
Composite Low-Beam
9006GS
Headlamm
Composite High-Beam
9005
Headlamps
Front Sidemarker Lamp
194
Front Parking and Turn Lamp
3157KX
Back-up Lamp
3157
Rear Parking, Stop, and
31 57
Turn Lamp
CHMSL
912
For any bulb not listed here, contact your dealer.
I
~
It is recommended that this component be replaced as
a unit by your dealer.
5-58
~
~
~ I--
.
J
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear and cracking. See “Wiper
Blade Check in At Least Twice a Year on page 6-13 for
more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. To remove the type with a
release clip, do the following:
1 Lift the wiper arm until it locks into a vertical
position.
=
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking
tab. Pull down on the blade assembly to release it
from the wiper arm hook.
3. The insert has two notches at one end that are
locked by bottom claws of the blade assembly.
At the notched end, pull the insert from the blade
assembly.
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the notched
end last, into the end with two blade claws. Then
slide the insert all the way through the blade claws
at the opposite end.
5. Make sure that the notches are locked by the
bottom claws. Make sure that all other claws
are properly locked on both sides of the insert slot.
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm
hook. Pull it up until the pivot locking tab locks
in the hook slot.
l . Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
into the windshield.
5-59
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
CAUTION:
5-60
(Continued)
Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact - such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, orif your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The Certificationrrire label, which is on the rear edge of
the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures
for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
0
If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you
can get the following:
Unusual wear
0
Badhandling
0
Roughride
0
Needless damage from road hazards
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Too much flexing
Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.
Too much heat
How to Check
Tireoverloading
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Badwear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
5-61
Dual Tire Operation
Tire Inspection and Rotation
When the vehicle is new, or whenever a wheel, wheel
bolt or wheel nut is replaced, check the wheel nut torque
after 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and
10 000 km) of driving. For proper torque and wheel nut
tightening information, see “Tightening the Wheel
Nuts” later in this section.
Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km).
The outer tire on a dual wheel setup generally wears
faster than the inner tire. Your tires will wear more
evenly and last longer if you rotate the tires periodically.
See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” earlier in this
section. Also see “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in
the Index for scheduled rotationinter ‘s.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-64 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-67 for more information.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves,
use the ratchevwheel wrench to tighten the cable. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-69.
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, also see Dual
Operation on page 5-62.
If you operate your vehicle with a tire that is
badly underinflated, the tire can overheat. An
overheated tire can lose air suddenly or catch
fire. You or others could be injured. Be sure all
tires (including the spare) are properly inflated.
See “Tires” and “Inflation - Tire Pressure” in the Index
for more information on proper tire inflation.
5-62
Tire
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See “Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services,” in Section 6, for scheduled
rotation intervals.
FRT
FRT
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, always use one of
the correct rotation patterns shown here when rotating
your tires.
When you install dual wheels, be sure that vent holes in
the inner and outer wheels on each side are lined up.
I lQ
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Certificationrrire label. Make certain that all wheel nuts
are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque”
under Capacities and Specifications on page 5- 101.
If your vehicle has single rear wheels, always use one
of the correct rotation patterns shown here when rotating
your tires.
Rust or dirt on awheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time.The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirtoff. See “Changing a Flat
Tire” in the Index.
5-63
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining. Some
commercial truck tires may
not have treadwear
indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-64
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Certificationflire label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an “ M S
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having
a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating and construction
type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
J tires C L . ~ ciause you t, lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires) the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
I
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
I
5-65
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction - AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature - A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
5-66
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
Using le wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
Whenever a wheel, wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced
on a dual wheel setup, check the wheel nut torque
after 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and
10 000 km) of driving. For proper torque, see “Wheel Nut
Torque” under Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-101.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-69 for more
information.
5-67
.
If a Tire Goes Flat
Used Replacement Wheels
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout”, here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash.If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
I
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
I
Tire Chains
Notice: Use tire chains only where legal and only
when you must. Use chains that are the proper size
for your tires. Install them on the tires of the rear
axle. Tighten them as tightly as possible with
the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow
the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can
hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop
and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow
down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the
wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle.
5-68
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop - well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
1
Changing a tire can cause an Ill,ury. ,'he
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured. Find a level place to change your tire.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won't
move, you can put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire on
the other side of the vehicle, at the
opposite end.
5-69
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
If you have a cargo van or
a passenger van, the
equipment you’ll need is
located in the rear
passenger side of corner
of the vehicle.
Remove the retaining wing bolt and lift it off the
mounting bracket.
If you have a van with the 15-passenger seating
arrangement, the equipment you’ll need is secured on
the rear passenger side floor of the vehicle.
Remove the retaining wing bolt and lift it out of the
mounting bracket.
5-70
Attach the wheel wrench
and ratchet, with the
DOWN side facing you.
The wheel wrench
E
u
Put the flat chisel end of the wheel wrench on an angle
through the hole between the body and the bumper.
Be sure the flat end connects into the hoist shaft.
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A), jack
handle extension (B), jack handle (C), wheel wrench (D)
and the ratchet (E).
Your spare tire is stored underneath the rear of your
vehicle. You will use the wheel wrench (D) and the
ratchet (E)to lower the spare tire.
The ratchet has a DOWN side and an UP side.
5-71
Turn the ratchet counterclockwise to lower the spare tire
to the ground. If the spare tire does not lower to the
ground, the secondary latch is engaged causing the tire
not to lower. See "Secondary Latch System" later in
this section.
5-72
A
When the tire has been lowered, pull the tire toward you
so you can reach the tire retainer and pull it up
through the wheel opening.
If you have a vehicle which was completed from a cab
and chassis, refer to the information from the body
supplier/installer.
The spare tire is a full-size tire, like the other tires on
your vehicle.
Notice: To help avoid vehicle damage, do not drive
the vehicle before the cable is restored.
Secondary Latch System
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch, do
the follo\.lhg:
Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It’s
designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling
off your vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire
is damaged. For the secondary latch to work, the tire
must be stowed with the valve stem pointing down.
Someone standing too close durin, the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If the
spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind you or
on either side of you as you pull the jack out
from the spare.
See “Storing the Spare Tire and Tools” later in
this section for instructions on storing the spare tire
correctly.
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed below.
I
5-73
4. Connect the jack handle (C) and jack handle
extension (B) together and press the retention
clip (arrow) so it engages.
1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable end is
visible.
2. If the cable is not visible, start this procedure at
Step 6.
3. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.
5. Attach the jack handle/jack handle extension to the
jack and slide the ratchet with the UP mark facing
you onto the end of the jack handle extension
so your set-up looks like the picture above.
5-74
8. Lower the jack by turning the ratchet
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the
spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by
the cable.
9. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to
push against the spare while firmly pulling
the jack out from under the spare tire with
the other hand.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, slide the
ratchet onto the wheel wrench and insert the
wheel wrench into the hoist shaft hole above the
bumper and turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise
to lower the spare the rest of the way. Be sure
the DOWN mark on the ratchet is facing you.
6. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear
bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack
under the center of the spare tire and turn the
handle clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the
secondary latch spring.
7 . Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place, this
lets you know that the secondary latch has
released. The secondary latch has released and
the spare tire is balancing on the jack.
10. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it
through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from
under the vehicle.
11. If the cable is hanging under the vehicle, turn the
wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the bumper
clockwise to raise the cable back up.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using
the hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.
To continue changing the flat tire, return to Step 4 of
“Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare
Tire” later in this section.
5-75
Removing the Wheel Covers
If your vehicle has plastic wheel nut caps, loosen them
by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. The
wheel nut caps are designed to remain with the center
cap. Remove the center cap.
If the wheel has a smooth center piece, place the chisel
end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and
gently pry it out.
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
1. With the DOWN side facing you, use the ratchet
and wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Don’t remove them yet.
2. Assemble the jack and tools for a front or rear flat
as follows:
Front Position
Front Flat: Assemble the jack (A) together with the
jack handle (B) and ratchet (C) as shown. Be
sure that the ratchet has the UP mark facing you.
5-76
Rear Flat: Assemble the jack (A) together with the
jack handle (B), jack handle extension (C) and
ratchet (D) as shown. Be sure that the ratchet has
the UP mark facing you. To assemble the jack
handle and jack handle extension, use the art and
text following.
Connect the jack handle (B) and jack handle
extension (C) together and press the retention clip
(arrow) so it engages.
5-77
Rear Position
Front Position
5-78
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.
Raisingyour vet- ewitt
l e jac mproper
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the ratchet clockwise.
Make sure the UP mark faces you. Raise the
vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough
room for the spare tire to fit.
5-79
5. Remove all the wheel
nuts, and take off the
flat tire.
5-80
~
6. Remove any rust or dirt
from
the
wheel
bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
I.-.st or dirl -.I the wheel, 0 .
fhe parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attachesto the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
. Put the wheel nuts
back on with the
rounded end of the
nuts toward the wheel.
Tighten each wheei
nut by hand until
the wheel is held
against the hub.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
-
I fer use oil or
?ase on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
5-81
le 4
Stop s,..lewhere as sc,.~ as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See “Capacities
and Specifications” in the Index for wheel nut
torque specification.
3 .I
L
9. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as
shown. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
CAUTION:
5-82
(Continued)
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See “Capacities and
Specifications” in the index for the wheel nut torque
specification.
10. Put the wheel cover back on, or put the center cap
and plastic wheel nut caps back on. Remove any
wheel blocks.
Remember that the jack, jacking equipment and tire
must be properly stored in their original storage position
before you begin driving again. The next part will
show you how.
St ing a
r'
or Spare
d Tools
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle
with the valve stem pointed down.
2. Pull the retaining bar through the center of the
wheel, making sure it is properly attached.
5-83
4. Attach the ratchet, with the UP side facing you,
the wheel wrench.
to
5. Put the flat end of the wheel wrench on an angle
through the hole in the rear door frame, above the
bumper.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the ratchet until the tire
is secure and the cable is tight. The spare tire hoist
cannot be overtightened.
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If the tire
moves, use the ratchet to tighten the cable.
You will hear two “clicks” when the tire is up all
the way.
3. Pull the wheel toward the rear of the vehicle,
keeping the cable tight.
5-84
Return the jacking equipment to the proper location.
Secure the items and replace the jack cover.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike a
match or get them on a. hot pa.rt of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed
space. When you use anything from a container to clean
your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s
warnings and instructions. And always open your doors
or windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Lacquer Thinner
0
They can all be hazardous - some more than
others - and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
Gasoline
Benzene
0
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
0
Acetone
PaintThinner
0
Nail Polish Remover
0
Bleach
0
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and
loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted
surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
Turpentine
5-85
FabricEarpet
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric
and carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains
very well.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened
towel or cloth.
You can get GM - approved cleaning products from
your dealer. See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-92.
Here are some cleaning tips:
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can - before
they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean
the entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any
loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Follow the directions on the container label.
4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate
the material and don’t rub it roughly.
5-86
sponge to remove any excess cleaner.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine
and blood can be removed as follows:
1 . Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a waterlbaking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
Vinyl
Top of the Instrument Panel
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
You may have to do this more than once.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for
this product.
Interior Plastic Components
Leather
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Glass Surfaces
For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
dealer for this product.
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
0
Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner
or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-92.
Notice: Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass,
because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing
decals on the inside rear window, since they
may have to be scraped off later. If abrasive cleaners
are used on the inside of the rear window, an
electric defogger element may be damaged. Any
temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.
5-87
.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
Cleaning the Outside of Your
Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every
six months. During very cold, damp weather more
frequent application may be required. See
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6- 79.
5-88
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle
well, removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on
page 5-92. Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See GM Vehicle CareAppearance
Materials on page 5-92.
If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Nofice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoatlclearcoat paint finish may
dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
5-89
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Aluminum Wheels
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-90
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
Finish Damage
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Notices When applying a tire dressing, always take
care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all
painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the
vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage the
paint finish and tires.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials avaliable from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on
the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
5-91
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms; blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into
the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-92
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
GM Vehicle Care/A 3pearance Materials
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax -Treated
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Sidewall Tire
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil and
asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black White
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery and
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
I
I
Usage
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
Spot Lifter
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on
Odor Eliminator
fabrics, vinyl, leather and
carpet.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6- 19.
Description
Description
GlassCleaner
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
Swirl Remover Polish
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
fine scratches and other
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
5-93
Vehicle Identification
Service Parts Identification Label
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
You’ll find this label on the front passenger door frame.
It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On
this label is:
your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
SAMPLE4UX1M072675
a list of all production options and special
equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
5-94
Electrical System
Add-on Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-76.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker in
the lamp switch. An electrical overload will cause the
iamps to flicker on ana off, or in some cases to remain
off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring
checked right away.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload,
overload due to heavy snow, etc., may cause wiper
linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow from
the windshield before using the windshield wipers. If
the overload is caused by some electrical problem and
not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
5-95
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Floor Console Fuse Block
The floor console fuse block is located under the driver’s seat.
U
Front of Vehicle
5-96
Fuse
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
a
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Usage
Spare
Outside Rear View Mirror
Courtesy Lamp/SEO
Left Rear Stopflurn Signal
Cargo Locks
Right Rear StopDurn Signal
Driver Locks
StopKenter High Mounted Stop
Lamp
Climate Control 1
Climate Control
Brakes
Heated MirrodDefogger
Right Rear Blower
Driver Turn Mirror
Door Locks
Upfitter Park
Not Available
Left Rear Park Lamp
Fuse
19
20
21
22
32
33
Relays
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Circuit Breaker
34
Usage
Pass Turn Mirror
Right Rear
Park
Lamp
Trailer Lamp
Park
Front Lamp
Park
Auxilaryl
Auxilary2
Usage
Window Residual Accessory Power
Auxiliary
Right Rear Defogger
Courtesy Lamp
Cargo Unlock
Driver Unlock
Park Lamp
Door Locks
Pass Unlock
Usage
Power Window
5-97
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The fuse block is in the engine compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
I
1
I
48
1
49
62
Front of Vehicle
5-98
Fuse
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Usage
Radio Battery
Powertrain Control Module Battery
Left Rear Turn Lamp
Right Rear Turn Lamp
Backup Lamps Trailer Wiring
Ignition 0
Stop Lamp
Right Rear DefoggedHeated Mirror
Right Daytime Running Lampmurn
Signal
Left Daytime Running Lampnurn
Signal
Truck Body Control Module 4
Fuel Pump
Trailer
Flasher
Horn
Truck Body Control Module 3
Trailer Stop/Turn Signal
Truck Body Control Module 2
Truck Body Control Module
Remote Function Actuator
Engine 2
Ignition E
Fuse
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Usage
Engine 1
Truck Body Control Module
Ignition 1
Spare
RPNlnside Rearview Mirror
Crankcase
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock
System
Auxiliary Power Outlets
Cigarette Lighter
Instrument Panel Cluster
Air Conditioning
Spare
Vent
Spare
Vehicle Back Up
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
System
Powertrain Control Module Ignition
Oxygen Sensor B
Oxygen Sensor A
Windshield Wipers
Right Headlamp - Low Beam
Left Headlamp - Low Beam
I
5-99
Fuse
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
63
64
5-100
Usage
Left Headlamp - High Beam
Right Headlamp - High Beam
Truck Body Control
Module-Accessory
Front Windshield Wiper
Anti-Lock Brakes
Ignition A
Trailer
Climate Control Blower
Ignition B
Spare
Spare
Fuse
Usage
Usage
Windshield Wiper
Air Conditioning
Spare
Headlamp - High Beam
Fuel Pump
Beam
Headlamp - Low
Relay
53
54
55
56
57
58
Horn
59
61
Starter
Spare
62
Circuit BreakerUsage
Seat
Power
60
Capacities and Specifications
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level or as recommended in this
manual.
See refrigerant charge iabei under the hood for charge capacity information and requirements.
En ine S ecifications
1-6-5-4-3-2
5-101
Capacities
Capacities
QTY Without Rear
Heater
QTY With Rear Heater
Application
Cooling System
After refill, the level must be rechecked. See “Cooling System” in the Index.
VORTECTM4300 V6
14.2 quarts (1 3.5 L)
16.3 quarts (15.5 L)
VORTECTM4800 V8
14.7 quarts (14.0 L)
16.9quarts (16.0 L)
13.9 quarts (1 3.2L)
16.0 quarts (15.2 L)
VORTECTM5300 V8
VORTECTM6000 V8
14.5 quarts (13.8 L)
17.1 quarts (1 6.2 L)
I
Capacities
I
Application
Metric
English
Engine Oil With Filter
After refill, the level must be rechecked. Add enough engine oil so that the fluid is within the proper operating
range. See Engine Oil on page 5-14
VORTECTM 4300 V6 (Vin W)
4.5 quarts
4.3 L
VORTECTM 4800 V8 ( Vin V)
I
6.0 quarts
5.7 L
6.0 quarts
5.7 L
VORTECTM 5300 V8 (Vin T)
5- 102
Application
VORTECTM 6000 V8 (Vin U)
r-
Capacities
QTY Without Rear
QTY With Rear Heater
Heater
I
6.0 quarts
!
5.7 L
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R-l34a (Front)
1.8 Ibs
(0.81kg)
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R-l34a (Front and Rear)
3.1 Ibs
(1.41 kg)
5-103
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information available at the time of printing,
and are subject to change. If a part listed in this manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle when it was
built, or if you have any questions, please contact your GM dealer.
These specifications are for information only. If you have any questions, see the service manual for the chassis or
refer to the body manufacturer's publications.
VIN Code
Oil Filter*
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter*
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter Kit**
PCV Valve"
Spark Pluqs
5-104
W
PF47
9C
V
PF44
T
U
PF44
PF44
A1 A1
51 9C
A1 51 9C A1 51 9C
51
52485513
52485513
52485513
52485513
CV 769-C
cv 2001-c
cv 2001-c
cv 2001-c
4 1-974
4 1-974 41 -974 41
-932
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ...................................... 6-2
Introduction ................................................... 6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment .................... 6-2
Maintenance Requirements .............................. 6-2
How This Section is Organized ......................... 6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ...........6-4
Using Your Maintenance Schedule .................... 6-4
Scheduled Maintenance ................................... 6-5
Part 6: Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
At the First 100, 1,000 and 6,000 Miles
(160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) ....................... 6-12
At Each Fuel Fill .......................................... 6-12
At Least Once a Month ................................. 6-13
At Least Twice a Year ................................... 6-13
At Least Once a Year ................................... 6.14
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections .........6.17
Steering and Suspension Inspection ................ 6.17
Exhaust System Inspection ............................ 6.17
Fuel System Inspection .................................. 6.17
Engine Cooling System Inspection ...................6.17
Throttle System Inspection ............................. 6.18
Rear Axle Service ......................................... 6.18
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(All-Wheel Drive) Inspection ........................ 6.18
Brake System Inspection ................................ 6.18
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....6-19
Part E: Maintenance Record ........................... 6.21
6- 1
Maintenance Schedule
Your Vehicle and the Environment
KEEP ENGINEOIL
AT THE PROPER
LEVEL AND CHANGEAS
RECOMMENDED
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can
even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper
fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase
the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect
our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
1
.
Maintenance Requirements
Introduction
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure
to follow recommended maintenance may not be
covered by warranty.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you
should let your dealer’s service department or another
qualified service center do these jobs.
Perform -. raintenceworkonavehiclecan
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
have a qualified technician do the work.
If you want to get the service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-10.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service
department or another qualified service center should
perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help
keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products,
or their equivalents, should be used whether you do
the work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to
record and keep track of the maintenance performed on
your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts. They
may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty
repairs.
6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
This part contains engine oil and chassis lubrication
scheduled maintenance which explains the engine oil life
system and how it indicates when to change the
engine oil and filter. Lubricate chassis components with
each oil change. Also, listed are scheduled maintenance
services which are to be performed at the mileage
intervals specified.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them.
When you go to your dealer for your service needs,
you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service
people will perform the work using GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
them. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives the
vehicle.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you to keep
your vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t
know exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer.
6-4
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Certification/Tire label. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-30.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within
driving limits.
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline
on page 5-5.
Octane
Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle. The services shown at 150,000 miles
(240 000 km) should be repeated at the same interval
after 150,000 miles (240 000 km) for the life of this
vehicle.
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-12
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6-17.
Footnotes
t The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
+A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6- 18.
6-5
Engine Oil and Chassis Lubrication
Scheduled Maintenance
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the GM
Oil Life System (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first.) Reset the system.
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can
vary considerably. For the oil life system to work
properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is
changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A change engine oil message will come on.
Change your oil as soon as possible within the next
two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system
6-6
may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for
over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. It is also important to check your
oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil on
page 5-14 for information on resetting the system.
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components with each engine oil
and filter change.
Lubricate the front suspension, kingpin bushings,
steering linkage and rear driveline center splines.
After the services are performed, record the date,
odometer reading and who performed the service on the
maintenance record pages in Part E of this schedule.
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
22,500 Miles (37500 km)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
U Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
U Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
U Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
U Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
0 Vehicles With GVWR Above 10,000 Ibs. Only:
0
Inspect shields for damage or looseness. Adjust or
replace as required. This is a Noise Emission Control
Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the
United States.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
c3
0
0
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote t.)
Vehicles With GVWR Above 10,000 Ibs. Only:
Inspect shields for damage or looseness. Adjust or
replace as required. This is a Noise Emission Control
Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the
United States.
6-7
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
50,000Miles (83 000 km)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle’s GVWR is over 3,600 Ibs or if the vehicle is
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
U Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
SII Vehicles With GVWR Above 10,000 Ibs. Only:
Inspect shields for damage or looseness. Adjust or
replace as required. This is a Noise Emission Control
Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the
United States.
hl Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-8
mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter at 100,000 miles
( I 66 000 km).
52,500Miles (87 500 km)
CIJ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
c1 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
CI Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
U Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +,)
0 Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote f.)
0 Vehicles With GVWR Above 10,000 Ibs. Only:
Inspect shields for damage or looseness. Adjust or
replace as required. 3 s is a Noise Emission Control
Service. Applicable :,::$ to vehicles sold in the
United States.
U Inspect Evaporative Control System. Check all fuel
and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook-up,
routing and condition. Check that the purge valve
works properly, if equipped. Replace as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote f . )
tl Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
75,000Miles (125 000 km)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Vehicles With GVWR Above 10,000 Ibs. Only:
Inspect shields for damage or looseness. Adjust or
replace as required. This is a Noise Emission Control
Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the
United States.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-9
82,500Miles (137 500 km)
0 Vehicles With GVWR Above 10,000 Ibs. Only:
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
Inspect shields for damage or looseness. Adjust or
replace as required. This is a Noise Emission Control
Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the
United States.
U Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
U Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
U Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first.)
U Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote t.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
6-10
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
CI Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
0 Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if
the vehicle’s GVWR is over 8600 Ibs or if the vehicle
is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
0 If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service
conditions listed previously and, therefore, haven’t
changed your automatic transmission fluid, change
both the fluid and filter.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every
60 months since last service, whichever occurs first).
See Engine Coolant on page 5-24 for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system
and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
0 Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission
Control Service.
6-1 1
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
At Each Fuel Fill
Listed in this part are owner checks and services
which should be performed at the intervals specified to
help ensure the safety, dependability and emission
control performance of your vehicle.
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-14 for further
details.
At the First 100, 1,000 and
6,000 Miles (160, 1 600
and 10 000 km)
Check the engine coolant level and add [email protected]'
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-24 for further details.
For vehicles with dual wheels, check dual wheel nut
torque. For proper torque, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-IO I.
6-12
Engine Oil Level Check
Engine Coolant Level Check
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-38 for further
details.
At Least Once a Month
Wiper Blade Check
Tire Inflation Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace
blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that
streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-88.
Make sure tries are inflated to the correct pressures.
Don’t forget to check your spare tire. See Tires on
page 5-60 for further details.
Cassette Tape Player Service
Clean cassette tape player. Cleaning should be done
every 50 hours of tape play. See Audio System(s)
on page 3-40 for further details.
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag
system does not need regular maintenance.)
Spare Tire Check
At least twice a year, after the monthly inflation check of
the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to
the correct tire inflation pressure, make sure that
the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try
to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the
ratchevwheel wrench to tighten the cable. See Changing
a Flat Tire on page 5-69.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Restriction
indicator Check
Your vehicle has an engine air cleaner filter restriction
indicator located on the air cleaner in the engine
compartment. The indicator lets you know when the air
cleaner filter is dirty and needs to be changed. Check
the indicator at least twice a year or when your engine
oil is changed, whichever occurs first. See Engine
Air C/eaner/Filter on page 5-79for more information.
Inspect your air cleaner filter restriction indicator
more often if the vehicle is used in dusty areas or under
off road conditions.
6-13
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-19.
Automatic Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See
Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5-27. A fluid loss
may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair
if needed.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all hood hinges, hood prop rod pivot, fuel filler
door, rear compartment hinges, latches, locks, hood
latch assembly, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor,
release pawl and any moving seat hardware. Part D
tells you what to use. More frequent lubrication may be
required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Starter Switch Check
When you are doing this -..eck, the .,hide
could move suddenly. If it does, you or others
could be injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-26 if
necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but don't start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
len
you
are
i n g this check, ? vehicle
could move suddenly. If it does, you or others
could be injured. Follow the steps below.
'
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
The key should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
The key should come out only in LOCK.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-26 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
6-15
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P)Mechanism
Check
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
6-16
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should /et your dealer’s
sewice department or other qualified service center do
these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which
could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-30.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See Service Publications
Ordering information on page 7-10.
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.
Steering and Suspension Inspection
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc.
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of
the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended
at least once a year.
Fuel System Inspection
6-17
Throttle System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that have high
effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator
and cruise control cables.
Rear Axle Service
Check the gear lubricant level in the rear axle and add if
needed. See Rear Axle on page 5-50. A fluid loss
may indicate a problem. Check the axle and repair it if
needed.
6-18
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(All-Wheel Drive) Inspection
Every 12 months, or at engine oil change intervals,
check front axle and transfer case and add lubricant
when necessary. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Check and have it repaired, if needed. Check vent
hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation.
Brake System Inspection
inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking
brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes
inspected more often if your driving habits or
conditions result in frequent braking.
--t
Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol
Engine Oil
of the proper viscosity. To determine
the preferred viscosity for your
vehicle’s engine, see Engine Oil on
page 5- 14.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only
Engine Coolant [email protected] See Engine
Coolant on page 5-24.
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
System
GM [email protected] Washer Solvent or
Windshield
Washer Solvent eauivalent.
Usage
I
C
I
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Parking Brake Canada 88901242, or equivalent) or
Cable Guides lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGl #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
GM Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering (GM Part No. US. 1052884, in
System
Canada 993294, or equivalent).
[email protected] -111 Automatic
Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Cylinders
Canada 10953474, or equivalent).
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Chassis
Canada 88901242, or equivalent) or
Lubrication
lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGl #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Wheel bearing lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGl #2, Category
Front Wheel
GC or GC-LB (GM Part No.
Bearings
U.S. 1051344, in Canada 993037,
or equivalent).
Usage
6-19
Usaqe
Hood Hinges
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
one-Piece
Propshaft
Spline,
Two-Piece
Propshaft
Ssline
6-20
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, in
Canada 1095351 1) or lubricant
meeting requirements of
GM 9985830.
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
FluidlLubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474. or eauivalentl.
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 10953014. or eauivalentl.
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Superlube (GM Part No.
U.S. 12371287, in Canada
10953437, or equivalent).
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service ana
any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
6-2-
Maintenance Record (csnt’d)
6-22
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Maintenance Record
~
6-23
MaintenanceRecordcont’d
6-24
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ...................... 7.2
Online Owner Center ...................................... 7.3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ................................ 7.4
Customer Assistance Off ices ............................ 7.4
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities .................................................. 7.5
Roadside Assistance Program .......................... 7.5
Courtesy Transportation ................................... 7.7
Reporting Safety Defects .................................. 7.9
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ............................................... 7.9
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................... 7.9
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .......7.9
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7.10
7-1
Customer Assistance
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to
your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center at MyGMLink is a resource for your
GM ownership needs. You can find your specific
vehicle information all in one place.
The Owner Center allows you to:
0
Get e-mail service reminders.
Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual.
Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone
number or write them at the following address:
Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Refer to the web for updated information.
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
To register your vehicle visit www.MyGMLink.com.
0
0
Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to MyGMLink members.
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Off ices
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U S . Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes
to write to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to
Chevrolet’s Customer Assistance Center.
All Overseas Locations
United States
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except
Puerto Rico and U S . Virgin Islands)
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: [email protected] (243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 01 1-52-5329 0 800
7-4
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to
$1,000 toward aftermarket
driver or passenger
adaptive equipment you
may require for your
vehicle (hand controls,
wheelchair/scooter
lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The program is available
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call
the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. All TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer
satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the
establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center. As the owner of a 2003 Chevrolet, membership
in Roadside Assistance is free.
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA
(243-8872). This toll-free number will provide you
over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor
mechanical problems. If your problem cannot be
resolved over the phone, our advisors have access to a
nationwide network of dealer recommended service
providers. Roadside membership is free; however some
services may incur costs.
Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer
Basic Care and Courtesy Care:
Roadside Basic Care provides:
Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872),
text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438
0
Free towing for warranty repairs
0
Basic over-the-phone technical advice
J
Available dealer services at reasonable costs
(i.e., wrecker services, locksmith/key service, glass
repair, etc.)
7-5
Roadside Courtesy Care provides:
Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined
previously)
Plus:
FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer
from a legal roadway)
-
FREE Locksmith/Key Service (when keys are lost
on the road or locked inside)
FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road)
FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)
FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on
the road)
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation
will be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided
by the Bumper-to-Bumper New Vehicle Limited
Warranty to eligible purchasers of 2003 Chevrolet
passenger cars and light duty trucks. (See your selling
dealer for details.)
Courtesy Care is available to retail and retail lease
customers operating 2003 and newer Chevrolet vehicles
-for
a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km),
whichever occurs first. All Courtesy Care services must
be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer
service management.
7-6
Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of or
included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to
modify or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Care at
any time.
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that
will provide you with quality and priority service.
When roadside services are required, our advisors will
explain any payment obligations that may be incurred
for utilizing outside services.
For prompt assistance when calling, please have the
following available to give to the advisor;
Vehicle Identification Number(VIN)
License plate number
Vehicle color
Vehicle location
Telephone number where you can be reached
Vehicle mileage
Description of problem
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value in
its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required.
This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty
repairs.
Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolet
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one
way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from
the dealership.
7-7
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement up to $30 per day (five day maximum)
may be available for the use of public transportation
such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to
$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a
rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a
maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges
and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
7-8
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact you dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign, However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A ON5
Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-9
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
7-10
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:OO PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-Mastercard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P. 0. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-11
NOTES
7-12
A
Accessory Power Outlets .................................
3-16
Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag-Equipped
1-76
Vehicle .......................................................
5-39
AddingWasher Fluid .......................................
7-8
AdditionalProgram Information ...........................
Additives, Fuel .................................................
5-6
Add-on Electrical Equipment ............................
5-95
4-31
Add-on Equipment ..........................................
Adjusting the Speakers
...... 3-43, 3-46, 3-51, 3-61
(Balance/Fade) ......
Air Bag
Off Light ..................................................... 3-28
ReadinessLight ..........................................
3-27
Air BagSystem ..............................................
1-64
Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag-Equipped
1-76
Vehicle ...................................................
Air Bag Off Switch .......................................
1-72
HowDoesanAirBag
Restrain? ....................
1-70
Servicing YourAir Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-76
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? ....................
1-70
What Will You See After an Air Bag
1-70
Inflates? ..................................................
When Should anAir Bag Inflate? ................... 1-68
Where Are the Air Bags? .............................. 1-66
Air Bag Systems ..............
............
AirCleaner/Filter, Engine .................................
All Overseas Locations ......................................
All-Wheel Drive ...............................................
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .........................
Aluminum Wheels ...........................................
AM ...............................................................
AM-FM Radio .................................................
Antenna, Fixed Mast .......................................
Anti-lock Brake System .....................................
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ..............
Appearance Care ............................................
Care of Safety Belts ....................................
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................
Cleaning the Inside ofYour Vehicle ................
Cleaning the Outside ofYour Vehicle ..............
Finish Damage ............................................
GMVehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..........
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Ashtrays ........................................................
1-69
5-19
7-4
5-49
2-26
5-90
3-71
3-41
3-73
4-6
3-32
5-85
5-88
5-92
5-85
5-88
5-91
5-92
5-91
5-91
5-88
3-16
1
System(s)
Audio
...
...........
AM-FM Radio .........................................
Care ofYour Cassette Tape Player ............
Care ofYour CD Player ...........................
CareYour
of
CDs .............
...........
Chime Level Adjustment ...........................
Fixed Mast Antenna .................................
Radio with Cassette and CD .....................
RadiowithCD ........................................
Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
............................
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Data
Systems(RDS) ........................................
Setting the Time for Radios
without Radio
DataSystems(RDS)
................................
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................
UnderstandingRadio Reception .....................
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
Automatic Transmission Check ..........................
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control
System Check .............................................
2
3-40
. 3-41
. 3-72
. 3-73
. 3-73
. 3-73
. 3-73
. 3-48
. 3-44
. 3-59
. 3-69
.
3-41
3-40
3-71
3-71
5-21
2-24
6-14
6-15
Backing Up ....................................................
Battery ..........................................................
Battery Replacement .........................................
Battery Run-Down Protection ............................
Before Leaving on a LongTrip .........................
Body Lubrication Service ..................................
Brake
Parking ......................................................
System Inspection .......................................
SystemWarningLight ..................................
Brake Adjustment ........................................
Brake Fluid ................................................
Brake Pedal Travel .........................................
BrakeWear ...................................................
Brakes ..........................................................
Braking ...........................................................
Braking in Emergencies .....................................
Break-In, NewVehicle .....................................
Bulb Replacement ...........................................
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps .....................................
Halogen Bulbs ............................................
Headlamps .................................................
Replacement Bulbs ......................................
Taillamps ................................................
BuyingNew Tires .......................................
4-43
5-43
2-6
3-16
4-20
6-14
2-26
6-18
3-31
5-42
5-40
5-42
5-42
5-40
4-5
4-8
2-20
5-54
5-56
5-54
5-54
5-58
5-56
5-64
C
California Fuel ..................................................
5-6
7-4
Canada ...........................................................
ii
CanadianOwners ................................................
Canadian Roadside Assistance ...........................
7-6
5-102
Capacities ....................................................
Capacities and Specifications ..........................
5-101
................
... 4-24, 4-32, 2-30
Carbon
Monoxide
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-88
Your Cassette Tape Player ............................
3-72
YourCD Player ...........................................
3-73
Your CDs ................................................... 3-73
Cargo Vans and Cab and Chassis Models
with an Air Bag Off Switch ............................
1-48
Cargo Vans and Cab and Chassis Models
without an Air Bag Off Switch ........................
1-47
Cargo Vans with a Passenger Air Bag and an
Air Bag Off Switch, Passenger Vans and
Cab and Chassis Models ..............................
1-37
Cargo Vans with a Passenger Air Bag and
without an Air Bag Off Switch ........................
1-40
........ 3-55
Cassette Tape Messages .................
Cassette Tape Player Service .......................
6-13
CDAdapter Kits ............................................. 3-56
Center High Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 5-58
3-14
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp .........................
Center Passenger Position, Safety Belts ..... 1-25, 1-26
Chains. Tires ..............................................
5-68
Charging System Light ....................................
3-29
Check
3-33
Engine Light ...............................................
Gages Warning Light ...................................
3-38
Check Engine Light ......................................... 3-33
........................
5-41
Checking Brake Fluid ......
Checking Coolant ............................................
5-26
Checking Engine Oil ........................
......... 5-14
Checking Things Under the Hood .....,
......... 5-10
Checking Your Restraint Systems .........
..... 1-77
5-92
Chemical Paint Spotting ...................................
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ...............................
1-42
1-36
Infants and Young Children ...........................
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCHSystem) ..........................
1-51
1-34
Older Children .............................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................
1-53
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center
Seat Position ...................................
1-57,1-58
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
1-54
Outside Seat Position ...........................
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ...................................
1-59
Top Strap ...................................................
1-49
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ 1-50
Where to Put the Restraint ...........................
1-45
3
Chime Level Adjustment ...........................
..... 3-73
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
3-16
Cleaning
Inside ofYour Vehicle .................................. 5-85
Outside ofYour Vehicle ............................
5-88
Underbody Maintenance ...........................
5-91
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-88
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .......................
5-89
Climate Control System ...................................
3-17
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System ...... 3-19
Rear Heating System ...................................
3-18
Compact Disc Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48, 3-58, 3-69
Control of a Vehicle ..............
.................... 4-5
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-32
Heater,Engine ............................................ 2-22
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-33
Cooling System .............................................. 5-30
Cruise Control ..................................................
3-9
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-38
Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-11
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ....................................................... 7-4
7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ...........................
Customer Satisfaction Procedure .....................
7-2
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ................................................
7-5
~
~
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ...... 7-9
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................
7-9
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
7-9
Government ..............................................
Roadside Assistance Program .........................
7-5
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-10
Daytime Running Lamps ..................................
Daytime Running LampsIndicatorLight .............
Defensive Driving .............................................
Defogging and Defrosting .................................
Directing the Airflow ........................................
Doing Your Own ServiceWork ...........................
Dome Lamp Override ......................................
Dome Lamps .................................................
Door
60/40 Swing-Out Side Door ...........................
Last Door Closed Locking ..............................
Locks ..........................................................
Power Door Locks .........................................
Rear Door Security Locks ...............................
Rear Doors .................................................
Sliding Side Door ........................................
Driver
Position, Safety Belt .............
.............
3-13
3-38
4-2
3-21
3-20
5-4
3-15
3-15
2-13
2-8
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-14
2-11
1-16
Driving
At Night ...............
...........................
4-14
City ...........................................................
4-18
Defensive .....................................................
4-2
Drunken .......................................................
4-2
Freeway ..................................................... 4-19
4-22
Hill and Mountain Roads ..............................
In Rain and onWet Roads ...........................
4-15
Winter ........................................................ 4-24
Driving On Grades ..........................................
4-44
Driving on Snow or Ice ....................................
4-25
Driving Through Deep Standing Water ............... 4-17
4-17
Driving Through Flowing Water .........................
4-42
Driving with a Trailer .......................................
Dual Stage Air Bags ........................................ 1-69
Dual Tire Operation ......................................... 5-62
E
Electrical System
Add-on Equipment ......................................
Fusesand Circuit Breakers ...........................
Headlamp Wiring .........................................
WindshieldWiperFuses ...............................
Electronic Road-Speed Governor .......................
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs ...............................................
5-95
5-96
5-95
5-95
3-26
3-35
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter .........................................
Battery .......................................................
Change Engine Oil Light ...............................
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............
Coolant ......................................................
Coolant Heater ............................................
Coolant Temperature Gage ...........................
Cooling System Inspection ............................
Engine Compartment Overview ......................
Exhaust .....................................................
Fan Noise ..................................................
Oil .............................................................
Overheating ................................................
Starting ......................................................
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Restriction
Indicator Check ...........................................
Engine Compartment FuseBlock ......................
Engine Coolant Level Check .............................
Engine Oil Additives ........................................
Engine Oil and Chassis Lubrication Scheduled
Maintenance .................................................
Engine Oil Level Check ...................................
Entry Lighting .................................................
Exit Lighting ...................................................
Extender, Safety Belt .......................................
Exterior Lamps ...............................................
5-19
5-43
3-37
3-33
5-24
2-22
3-32
6-17
5-12
2-30
5-37
5-14
5-28
2-21
6-13
5-98
6-12
5-17
6-6
6-12
3-15
3-15
1-33
3-12
5
F
FabriclCarpet ...................
.......................
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ......................................
3-52,
Finding aPTY Station .............................
Finding a Station ....................
3-42, 3-44, 3.49,
Finish Care ....................................................
Finish Damage ...............................................
Fixed MastAntenna ........................................
Flash-To-Pass Feature .......................................
Flat Tire ........................................................
Flat Tire, Changing .........................................
Floor Console Fuse Block ................................
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................
Power Steering ...........................................
Windshield Washer ......................................
FM ...............................................................
Following Distance ..........................................
Footnotes ........................................................
Front Axle ......................................................
Fuel ...............................................................
Additives ......................................................
California Fuel ..............................................
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................
Filling YourTank ...........................................
5-86
5-19
3-62
3-59
5-89
5-91
3-73
3-7
5-68
5-69
5-96
5-21
5-37
5-38
3-71
4-43
6-5
5-51
5-5
5-6
5-6
5-9
5-7
Fuel (cont.)
Fuels in Foreign Countries .......................... 5-6
Gage ......................................................... 3-39
Gasoline Octane ....................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
...... 5-5
System Inspection ................................
6-17
Fuel Regulator ........................
................ 2-22
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
5-96
Windshield Wiper .........................................
5-95
G
Gage
Check Gages Warning Light ..........................
Engine Coolant Temperature .........................
Fuel ..........................................................
Oil Pressure ...............................................
Speedometer ..............................................
....
.......
................
Voltmeter
Gage
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................
Specifications ...............................................
Glass Surfaces ...............................................
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ....................................................
3-38
3-32
3-39
3-36
3-25
3-30
5-5
5-5
5-87
7-5
I
Hazard Warning Flashers ...................................
3-4
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer ....................
3-7
HeadlampWiring ............................................
5-95
Headlamps ....................................................
5-54
BulbReplacement .......................................
5-54
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
5-56
Parking Lamps .........................................
HalogenBulbs ............................................ 5-54
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-21
Hill and Mountain Roads ..................................
4-22
Hitches .......................................................... 4-41
Hood
5-10
Checking Things Under ................................
5-10
Release .....................................................
Horn ............................................................... 3-5
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank ............................................ 5-32
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator .................. 5-34
How to Add Fluid ............................................
5-23
How to Check ........................................ 5-21, 5-61
How to Check Lubricant ...................................
5-50
HowtoCheckPower
Steering Fluid .................. 5-38
How to Reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL Light ... 5-18
How to Use This Manual ......................................
ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-15
Hydroplaning ..................................................
4-17
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine .......... 5-29
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ............... 5-28
If the Light Is Flashing ..................................... 3-34
If the Light Is On Steady .................................
3-34
IfYou Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ....... 4-28
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer .....................
4-33
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard ...........................
4-26
2-20
Ignition Positions .............................................
6-15
Ignition Transmission Lock Check ......................
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-36
Inflation -- Tire Pressure .................................. 5-61
Inside Day/Night Rearview
Mirror
.....
..... 2-32
Inspection
6-18
Brake System .............................................
Engine Cooling System ................................
6-17
Exhaust System .......................................... 6-17
Fuel System ............................................... 6-17
Part C - Periodic Maintenance .......................
6-17
6-17
Steering and Suspension ..............................
Throttle System ........................................... 6-18
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(All-Wheel Drive) ......................................
6-18
Instrument Panel
Cluster ....................................................... 3-24
3-2
Overview .....................................................
Instrument Panel Brightness Control .................. 3-14
Interior Lamps ................................................
3-14
Interior Plastic Components ..............................
5-87
7
Jump Starting ...........
....
...........
... 5-44
K
Key Lock Cylinders Service ..............................
Keyless EntrySystem .......................................
Keys ...............................................................
6-14
2-3
2-2
Lamps
Exterior ......................................................
3-12
Interior .......................................................
3-14
Lamps On Reminder ....................................... 3-13
Lap Belt ........................................................
1-26
Lap-Shoulder Belt ...........................................
1-16
Last Door Closed Locking ..................
......... 2-8
LATCHSystem
Child Restraints ...........................................
1-51
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................
1-53
Leather .........................................................
5-87
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running .....................................................
2-28
8
Light
Air Bag Off .........................................
... 3-28
Air Bag Readiness ...............................
... 3-27
Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning ...........
... 3-32
Brake System Warning .........................
... 3-31
... 3-37
Change Engine Oil ..............................
Charging System .................................
... 3-29
... 3-38
Check Gages Warning .........................
Cruise Control .....................................
... 3-38
Daytime Running LampsIndicator ..........
... 3-38
Low Coolant Warning ...........................
... 3-33
Malfunction Indicator ............................
... 3-33
Safety BeltReminder ...........................
... 3-26
Security .............................................
... 3-37
Tow/Haul Mode ...................................
... 3-38
... 4-30
Loading Your Vehicle ...............................
..... 4-8
Locking RearAxle ..................................
... 2-10
Lockout Protection ..................................
Locks
Door .................................................
..... 2-7
..... 2-8
Last Door Closed Locking ....................
Lockout Protection .......................................
2-10
Power Door .................................................. 2-8
Rear Door Security Locks ...............................
2-9
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-13
Low Coolant WarningLight ..............................
3-33
M
Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts .......... 5-104
Maintenance Schedule
At Each Fuel Fill .........................................
6-12
At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-13
At Least Once a Year ..................................
6-14
At Least Twice a Year ..................................
6-13
At the First 100, 1,000 and 6,000 Miles
(160, 1 600 and 10 000km) .......................
6-12
Brake System Inspection ..............................
6-18
Engine Cooling System Inspection ................. 6-17
Exhaust System Inspection ...........................
6-17
FuelSystem Inspection ................................ 6-17
How This Section is Organized .......................
6-3
Introduction ..................................................
6-2
Maintenance Requirements .............................
6-2
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ............. 6-12
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 6-17
Part D - Recommended Fluids and
6-19
Lubricants ...............................................
Part E - Maintenance Record ........................
6-21
Rear Axle Service ........................................
6-18
Scheduled Maintenance .................................
6-5
Steering and Suspension Inspection ............... 6-17
Throttle System Inspection .........................
6-18
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(All-Wheel Drive) Inspection .......................
6-18
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
6-4
Using Your ...................................................
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Maintenance When Trailer Towing .....................
4-45
4-43
Making Turns .................................................
3-33
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................
Manual Seats ...................................................
1-3
Manual Windows ............................................ 2-16
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle ........, ... 2-5
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) .................................
7-4
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................
2-32
2-33
Outside Camper-Type Mirrors ........................
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-35
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-35
Outside Manual Mirror ..................................
2-32
Outside Power Mirrors ..................................
2-34
Outside Remote Control Mirror ......................
2-32
Model Reference ................................................ vi
7-3
MyGMLink.com ................................................
2-20
New Vehicle Break-In ......................................
Noise Control System, Tampering ......................
5-52
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ........... 5-104
9
0
P
Off-Road Recovery ................
.... 4-1 1
Oil
Change Engine Oil Light ..........
........ .... 3-37
Engine ..................................
........ .... 5-14
Pressure Gage .......................
........ .... 3-36
Older Children, Restraints ...........
........
.... 1-34
Online Owner Center ................. .............. ........... 7-3
[email protected] Personal Calling ........... ..... ............ .... 2-37
[email protected] Services ...................... ..... ............ .... 2-36
[email protected] System ....................... ..... ........ .... .... 2-36
[email protected] VirtualAdvisor .............. ..... ........ ........ 2-37
Operation Tips ........................... ..... ............ .... 3-22
Other Warning Devices ............... ........... ........... 3-5
Outlet Adjustment .......................
........ .... 3-22
Outside
Camper-Type Mirrors ...............
.... 2-33
2-35
Convex Mirror .............................................
Heated Mirrors ............................................
2-35
Manual Mirror .............................................
2-32
Power Mirrors .............................................
2-34
Remote Control Mirror ..................................
2-32
Owners, Canadian ...............................................
ii
7-10
Owner’s Information ........................................
Park (P)
..... 2-29
Shifting Out of ........
Parking
Brake .....................................................
2-26
Over Things That Burn .................................
2-30
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
Park (P) Mechanism Check ........................
6-16
Parking on Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..... 4-45
Park (P)
Shifting Into ............................................. 2-27
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ............ 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ................ 6-12
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections .......... 6-17
Part D - Recommended Fluids andLubricants .... 6-19
Part E - Maintenance Record ...........................
6-21
Passenger Vans with an Air Bag Off Switch ........ 1-46
Passenger Vans without an Air Bag Off Switch ... 1-45
Passing .................................................
4-11 , 4-43
[email protected] .....................
......... 2-19
..... 4-31
Payload .............................
Plan Ahead When Possible ................................
7-7
Playing a Cassette Tape ..................................
3-54
Playing a Compact Disc .................. 3-46, 3-56, 3-64
10
Playing a Specific Loaded
CompactDisc .............................................
, .. 3-41 , 3-44, 3-48,
Playing the Radio .........
Power
....
........
Accessory Outlets ..........
Door Locks ...........................................
Seat ............................................................
Steering Fluid .............................................
Windows ....................................................
Power Steering ................................................
Pretensioners,SafetyBelt ................................
Primary Radio Controls ....................................
3-65
3-59
3-16
2-8
1-4
5-37
2-17
4-9
1-33
3-69
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-14
RadiatorPressureCap .............
...............
Radio Messages .............................
3-43, 3-46,
Radios ..........................................................
AM-FM Radio .............................................
CareofYour Cassette Tape Player ................
Care ofYour CD Player ...............................
Care ofYour CDs ........................................
Radio with Cassette and CD .........................
RadiowithCD ............................................
Radio with Six-Disc CD
................................
5-27
3-54
3-40
3-41
3-72
3-73
3-73
3-48
3-44
3-59
Radios (cont.)
Rear Seat Audio .......................................... 3-69
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Data
Systems (RDS) ........................................
3-41
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ................................
3-40
Theft-Deterrent ............................................
3-71
Understanding Reception ..............................
3-71
RDS Messages ...................................... 3-53,
3-63
Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-15
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System ......... 3-19
Rear Axle ......................................................
5-50
Locking ........................................................
4-8
Service ......................................
, ............ 6-18
.......... 2-9
Rear Door Security Locks ................
Rear Doors ................................................. 2-14
Rear Heating System ......................................
3-18
1-30
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ......................
3-69
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ....................................
1-6
Rear Seat Operation .........................................
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions ............. 1-27
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-27
3-70
RearSeat Radio Controls ................................
3-21
Rear Window Defogger ....................................
2-32
Rearview Mirrors .............................................
.......... 1-4
Reclining Seatbacks ........................
Recreational VehicleTowing .............................
4-29
2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-4
11
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ..................................................
5-76
Removing theRearSeat ...................................
1-6
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-70
Removing the Wheel Covers ............................
5-76
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-58
Replacing Brake System Parts ..........................
5-43
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash ......................................
....... 1-78
Replacing the Rear Seats ..................................
1-8
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government ...............................
7-9
General Motors .............................................
7-9
United States Government .............................. 7-9
6-13
Restraint System Check ...................................
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-77
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash ..............................................
1-78
Restraint Systems
Checking ..................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-78
Resynchronization ............................................. 2-5
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ......................
2-21
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-25
Roadside Assistance Program ........................
7-5
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-31
12
S
Safety Belt
Pretensioners ..............................................
1-33
Reminder Light ............................................
3-26
Safety Belts
Care of ......................................................
5-88
Center Passenger Position ....................
1-25, 1-26
Driver Position ............................................
1-16
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-15
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts
..... 1-14
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults ......................................
1-30
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-27
1-25
Right Front Passenger Position ......................
Safety Belt Extender ....................................
1-33
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-24
Safety Belts AreforEveryone
.......................
1-10
Safety Chains ................................................. 4-41
Safety Warnings and Symbols
...
III
..............................
Scheduled Maintenance ...............
.............. 6-5
Seats
Manual ........................................................
1-3
Power Seat .................................................. 1-4
Rear Seat Operation ......................................
1-6
Reclining Seatbacks ..................................
1-4
Secondary Latch System .....
................ 5-73
Securing a Child Restraint
CenterSeat Position ............................
1.57. 1-58
Designedfor the LATCHSystem ................... 1-53
Rear Outside Seat Position ...........................
1-54
Right Front Seat Position ..............................
1-59
3-37
Security Light .................................................
Selecting the Fan Speed ..................................
3-20
Service ...........................................................
5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour
Vehicle .....................................................
5-4
Doing Your OwnWork ................................... 5-4
EngineSoonLight ....................................... 3-33
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-10
Service Bulletins .............................................
7-10
Service Manuals ............................................. 7-10
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ............ 1-76
Setting Preset PTYs ................................
3-52, 3-63
Setting Preset Stations ............ 3-42, 3-45, 3-50, 3-60
Setting the Temperature ................................... 3-20
Setting the Time
RadioswithRadioDataSystems(RDS)
......... 3-41
RadioswithoutRadio Data Systems (RDS) ..... 3-40
Setting the Tone
3-43,3-45,3-50,3-60
(Bassnreble) ......................
5-91
Sheet Metal Damage .......................................
2-27
Shifting Into Park(P) .......................................
Shifting Out of Park (P) ...................................
2-29
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ...........................
1-18
Single StageAirBags .....................................
1-68
Skidding ........................................................ 4-13
Sliding Side Door ............................................
2-11
4-17
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips .......................
6-13
Spare Tire Check ............................................
5-86
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems .....................
Specifications, Capacities ...............................
5-101
Speedometer ..................................................
3-25
Starter Switch Check ....................................... 6-14
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-21
4-9
Steering ..........................................................
Steering and Suspension Inspection .................. 6-17
Steering in Emergencies ..................................
4-10
4-9
Steering Tips ...................................................
Storage Areas ................................................ 2-38
............... 5-83
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ......................
4-28
Sun Visors .....................................................
2-18
Swing-Out Side Door, 60/40 .............................
2-13
2-18
Swing-OutWindows ........................................
13
T
Taillamps .......................................................
5-56
Tampering With Noise Control System
5-52
Prohibited ...................................................
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .....................................
3-71
Theft-Deterrent Systems ...................................
2-19
[email protected] .................................................. 2-19
Throttle System Inspection ............................... 6-18
Tilt Wheel ........................................................
3-5
Tire Inflation Check .........................................
6-13
Tires .....................................................
5-60, 5-91
Buying NewTires ........................................ 5-64
5-68
Chains .......................................................
Changing a Flat Tire ....................................
5-69
Dual Tire Operation .....................................
5-62
If a Tire Goes Flat .......................................
5-68
5-61
Inflation -- TirePressure ...............................
Inspection and Rotation ................................
5-62
.... 5-65
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..............
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Wheel Replacement ..........................
.... 5-67
When It Is TimeforNew Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater ....................
2-23
14
5-87
Topof the Instrument Panel .............................
Top Strap ......................................................
1-49
Top Strap Anchor Location ...............................
1-50
Torque Lock ...................................................
2-29
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires .................. 4-40
4-33
Tow/Haul Mode ...............................................
Tow/Haul Mode Light .......................................
3-38
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-29
Towing a Trailer ..........................................
4-32
Your Vehicle ...............................................
4-29
Trailer Brakes ................................................. 4-42
Trailer Wiring Harness .....................................
4-46
Transfer Case ................................................ 5-49
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ...........................................
5-21
Transmission Operation, Automatic ....................
2-24
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit
Repair Manual ............................................
7-10
7-7
Transportation Options ......................................
Trip Odometer ................................................
3-26
Turn and Lane Change Signals ..........................
3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-6
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer .................. 4-44
U
Underbody Flushing Service .............................
Understanding Radio Reception ........................
UniformTireQuality Grading ............................
United States ...................................................
Using Cleaner on Fabric ..................................
UsingRDS ............................................
3-51,
Using Song List Mode .....................................
6-16
3-71
5-65
3-4
5-86
3-61
3-67
v
Vehicle
Control ........................................................
4-5
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-30
Symbols .........................................................
iv
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-94
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-94
Vehicle Storage ..............................................
5-43
Vinyl .............................................................
5-87
VisorVanityMirror .......................................... 2-18
2-18
Visors ...........................................................
Voltmeter Gage ..............................................
3-30
Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators .... ......... 3-23
Warnings
Hazard Warning Flashers ...............................
3-4
.......... 3-5
Other Warning Devices ................
...
Safety and Symbols .........................................
III
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-88
Weatherstrip Lubrication ................................... 6-14
4-35
Weight of the Trailer ........................................
Weight of the Trailer Tongue .............................
4-40
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................
5-16
What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-18
5-25, 5-38, 5-50
What to Use ..................................
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance ..........................
5-66
5-67
Replacement ...............................................
When to Add Engine Oil ..................................
5-15
5-17
When to Change Engine Oil .............................
When to Check .............................................. 5-61
When to Check and Change ............................
5-21
When to Check Lubricant .................................
5-50
When to CheckPower Steering Fluid ................ 5-38
When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking
on a Hill .....................................................
4-45
15
Where to Put the Restraint ...............................
Why Safety Belts Work ....................................
Windows .......................................................
Manual ......................................................
Power ........................................................
Swing-Out Windows .....................................
Windshield and Wiper Blades
...........................
Windshield Washer ...........................................
Fluid ..........................................................
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check ................
16
1-45
1-11
2-16
2-16
2-17
2-18
5-90
3-8
5-38
6-12
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ................................... 5-59
Fuses ........................................................
5-95
Windshield Wipers ............................................
3-7
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-24
..... 6-13
Wiper Blade Check .............................
Your Vehicle and the Environment .......................
6-2
-6NOTES
t
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement